Home

Samsung SGH-T769NKBTMB User's Manual

1. Enter your Email address and Password information Tap Show password to view the password string as you enter it e Email address your Outlook work email address e Password typically your network access password case sensitive Tap Show password to show your password This is helpful and can help confirm that you did not accidentally enter this password incorrectly Tap Send email from this account by default to make this your default email account for outbound emails Tap Done gt Next Consult your Network or IT Administrator for further details and support Tap Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync from the add new email account screen When prompted to provide additional detailed information enter an updated Domain and confirm your User name and Password information Important In some cases it might be necessary for you to update or enter a new Domain name in this field Messages 119 e If your network requires SSL encryption tap the Use secure connection SSL field to place a check mark in the box and activate this additional level Most often this option should be enabled e f your network requires that you accept SSL certificates tap the Accept all SSL certificates field to place a check mark in the box and activate this additional level Most often this option is not required Confirm this information with your IT Administrator Important If your exchange server requires this feature leaving this
2. AllShare 2 Follow the on screen prompts The application contains two separate streaming media options e My device allows you to stream share selected multimedia content from your device to DLNA compliant device connected to the same WAP e Remote device allows you to receive and playback media stored externally Server laptop etc directly on your device 154 Configuring AllShare Settings The AllShare application must first be configured prior to its initial use You must setup parameters such as connected Wi FI Items to share source server address and external device acceptance rights 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt allshare 2 Press and then tap Settings and configure the following settings as desired e Device name defaults to your phone Use the keypad to enter a new Media server if desired and tap Save e Share video photos music allows you to restrict what is shared from your phone Tap the items you want to share e Upload from other devices allows you set the phone to select how uploads from other devices are started Tap Always accept Always ask or Always reject Default memory allows you to have media saved to your Phone or Memory Card Tap an option Subtitles allows you to see subtitles on shared media Depending on the setting you changed a pop up screen may display to restart AllShare Tap Yes to continue Transmitting Media via AllShare 1 Tap the
3. 3 Ina single motion touch and scroll up or down the page to scroll through the message if additional pages were added Viewing Messages from Lock Screen When you are unable to receive a message for any reason and your screen is locked the number of missed messages are displayed on the Lock screen immediately after a call is missed To view a missed message immediately 1 Press to reactive the screen 2 Touch and drag the button with the number of missed messages on it outside of the on screen large Circle The messages screen opens and shows the contents of the most recent message Messages 109 Message Threads Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped into message threads Threaded messages allow you to see all the messages exchanged similar to a chat program and displays a contact on the screen Message threads are listed in the order in which they were received with the latest message displayed at the top To reply to a text message 1 From the Home screen tap 2 While the message is open tap the Type to enter message field and Reply Bubble Text Message Thread then type your reply message 110 Compose your reply Your texts are colored Blue and your caller s replies are Yellow Tap Send to deliver your reply sots Press and then select one of the available message options page 108 To access message thread options gt From the main
4. Back View of Your Phone The following illustration shows the external elements of your phone Flash is used to take photos in low light conditions Camera lens is used to take photos External speaker allows you to hear ringers music and other sounds offered by your phone Understanding Your Device 23 Phone Display Your phone s display provides information about the phone s status and is the interface to the features of your phone The display indicates your connection status signal strength battery status and time Icons display at the top of the phone when an incoming call or message is received and also alerts you at a specified time when an alarm was set The screen also displays notifications and Application or shortcut bar with four icons Phone Contacts Messaging and Applications Signal strength Connection Status Status Bar i Battery status Time Notification area Status area Google search Home Screen Shortcuts Primary Shortcuts 24 Display settings In this menu you can change various settings for the for the wallpaper cube brightness or backlight p gt From the Home screen tap Applications gt Settings gt Display For more information refer to i Display Settings on page 225 Status Bar The Status Bar shows information about the connection status signal strength phone battery level and time and displays notifications about incoming messages
5. Draw your pattern by touching your first on screen point Then without removing your finger from the screen drag your finger over adjacent points until the gray trace line overlaps each point and they are highlighted with a green circle When you have connected at least four dots in a vertical horizontal or diagonal direction lift your finger from the screen and tap Continue Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then tapping Confirm The Unlock pattern is set Changing the Screen Lock Pattern This feature allows you to change the previously stored unlock pattern and update it if necessary This process is similar to changing your password from time to time 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Location and security 2 Tap Change screen lock 3 Retrace your current pattern on the screen 4 Tap Pattern and repeat steps 3 7 from the previous section Using a Visible Pattern When enabled this feature displays the onscreen lock grid that is used to unlock the phone Using Tactile Feedback When enabled the User tactile feedback option you will feel vibration as feedback while drawing the pattern using a PIN or password lock Changing Your Settings 229 PIN Lock and Unlock 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Location and security 2 Tap Set up screen lock 3 Tap PIN 4 Enter a PIN number using the numeric keypad and touch Continue to confirm the password 5 Confirm th
6. Message Options 1 From the Home screen tap Messaging 2 From within an open message press to display additional messaging options e Insert smiley allows you to add insert smiley icons images emoticons e Preview provides a preview of the MMS message content e Call places an outgoing call to the sender e Add text allows you to add text items from sources such as Location Contacts Memo Task Calendar and Text templates e View contact reveals the current Contact s overview screen Add Remove slide converts an SMS message into an MMS Multimedia message and allows you to attach an existing slideshow Once the message has been converted into in an MMS message press and tap More to choose from these options Add slide Remove slide Add subject Duration 6 sec Layout bottom or Delete message More when in an SMS message plain text provides additional options such as Add subject and Delete messages Viewing Newly Received Messages When you receive a message your phone notifies you by displaying gt lt within the Notification area at the top left of your Home screen To read a message 1 Open the Notification Bar and select the message For more information refer to Notification Bar on page 28 or From the Home screen tap then tap the new message to view its contents The selected message displays on the screen 2 Tap CS to play a multimedia message
7. Use the following procedure to configure your phone to synchronize with a corporate email account 1 From the Home screen tap FA Applications Settings gt Accounts and sync Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Accounts and sync 2 Locate the email account containing the events you wish to synchronize 3 Tap O within the adjacent account field to reveal the accoun s synchronization settings screen 4 Toggle the check mark adjacent to either the Sync Contacts Sync Calendar or Sync Tasks fields to manually sync the account Motion Settings This feature allows you to assign specific functions to certain phone actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope To activate motion p gt Press cay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Motion gt Motion activation Note If Motion activation is not enabled all motion services are greyed out and disabled To activate different motion functions 1 Activate and configure any of the following motion features e Turm over to mute activates the mute function for incoming calls and playing sounds e Double tap to speak allows you to activate voice commands within Voice talk 2 Tutorial provides on screen visual explanations of the above features Changing Your Settings 237 Privacy Settings Location settings backup configurations or reset the phone to erase all personal data p gt Press fay gt and then tap sO Setti
8. 116 Enter your Email address and Password information Tap Show password to view the password string as you enter it Email address your Outlook work email address e Password typically your network access password case sensitive Tap Show password to show your password This is helpful and can help confirm that you did not accidentally enter this password incorrectly If avaialble tap Send email from this account by default to make this your default email account for outbound emails Tap Next If prompted to sign up to Social Hub tap OK e Tap Manual setup to configure your connection settings manually POPS or IMAP Follow the on screen prompts and enter the information specific to your email provider e The unique account name is used to differentiate this account from other email accounts accessed by your device 7 At the Set up email screen name the account and enter a screen name to identify yourself on this account If you have already setup this account skip to step 8 Messages for this account display on the Inbox tab You can also view Personal information for this account Receipts if you setup the account to return receipts Travel information and more if available Tap Done to store the new account Important Only some Plus accounts include POP access allowing this program to connect If you are not able to sign in with your correct email address and password you may not have a p
9. Add 2 Sec Pause 63 Add to Favorites 106 Add to Home Adding and Removing 50 Adjusting Call Volume 69 Adobe PDF 177 Airplane Mode 210 Alarm Setting 207 Turning Off 208 Alarm Tone Setas 149 Alerts AMBER 113 Imminent Extreme 113 Imminent Severe 113 Presidential 113 Alerts on Call 219 AllShare Configuring Settings 154 Receiving Media 155 Transmitting Media 155 AMBER Alerts Disable 114 AMBER alerts 113 Answer Vibration 219 Answering a call 59 Answering Key 219 Application cache and data Clearing 166 Application Menus Navigating through 37 Applications 38 411 amp More 39 Accounts and Sync 39 AllShare 39 Android Market 42 164 Browser 46 185 Calculator 39 156 Calendar 39 Camera 40 157 Clock 40 Contacts 40 Downloads 40 Email 40 158 293 Files 41 Gallery 41 Game Base 41 Google Books 39 Google Mail 41 159 Google Maps 42 162 Google Music 43 Google Search 41 Kies air 41 Latitude 41 Lookout 42 Media Hub 42 Memo 42 167 Messaging 42 messaging 168 MobileLife Organizer 42 More for Me 43 Music Player 43 My Device 43 Navigation 43 Netflix 43 News amp Weather 43 Photo Editor 44 Places 44 Play Store 42 294 Polaris Office 44 Pro Apps 44 Settings 44 Slacker 44 Social Hub 44 Tags 45 Task 45 Task Manager 45 TeleNav GPS 45 TeleNav GPS Navigator 183 T Mobile Mall 44 T Mobile Name ID 44 T Mobile TV 45 Using the Camcorder 132 Using the Camera 126 Utility 45 Video Chat 45 Vid
10. If existing Google and Corporate email accounts have been synchronized to your phone these will be made available to your device during the creation of new entries These new Contacts entries can be assigned or saved to synced accounts such as Phone SIM Google or Corporate Google 1 Microsoft Exchange Act Phone Your phone automatically sorts the Contacts entries alphabetically You can create either a MobileLife Contacts Google Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Phone or SIM contact Note Before you can save a contact to the Phone Contact settings must be set to Save new contacts to Phone Important The Google and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account types are only visible after creating an email account of those types on your phone e MobileLife Contacts contacts are stored remotely on the MobileLife servers and can later be retrieved even if your phone has been damaged or reset e Google contacts are shared with your existing Google account and can also be imported to your phone after you have created a Google Mail account e Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync also known as Work or Outlook contacts are those contacts that are intended to be shared with either an Exchange Server or from within Microsoft Outlook Phone contacts are stored locally on the device Note If the phone is ever reset to its factory default parameters contacts stored on the phone can be lost e SIM contacts are stored within t
11. Samsung Keyboard Settings For more information refer to The Samsung Keypad on page 83 1 Press cay gt and then tap OP gt Language and keyboard gt Samsung keypad or From within an active text entry screen tap Foy from the bottom of the screen to reveal the Samsung keypad settings screen Changing Your Settings 241 242 Set any of the following options e Portrait keypad types allows you to choose a keypad configuration Qwerty Keypad default or 3x4 Keypad e Input languages sets the input language Tap a language from the available list The keyboard is updated to the selected language e XT9 enables predictive text entry mode This must be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings e XT9 advanced settings configuration of more advanced XT9 features For more information refer to Using XT9 Predictive Text on page 86 e Keypad sweeping allows changing between the input modes without having to use the Input Mode key You can sweep the displayed keypad aside in a similar manner to scrolling through the Home screens Character preview provides an automatic preview of the current character selection within the text string This is helpful when multiple characters are available within one key e Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of the first word in each sentence standard English style e Voice input activates the Voice input feature This is an
12. Sync memo allows you to sync your memos Google Docs or send individual memos PIN lock allows you to set a PIN lock so that a PIN must be entered before reading a memo Touch and hold the memo then select Send and choose the method to send this memo Bluetooth Email Messaging or Wi Fi From the memo list touch the upper left edit button and select a color for the memo s background then tap Save Applications and Development 167 Messaging This application allows you to use the Short Message Service SMS to send and receive short text messages to and from other mobile phones You can also use the Multi Media Service MMS to create multimedia messages to send and receive from other mobile phones p gt From the Home screen tap td Applications gt Messaging For more information refer to Messages on page 107 168 MobileLife Organizer Organizes your family s calendar family shopping list To Do list and Journal entries in one place Key features include e Easily access Family Members calendar on the go Shopping List Create a shared grocery list to prevent over purchasing or missed items e Calendar Easily see your entire family s calendar on one screen Calendar entries are available on the device and a computer e To Do Create a shared To Do list for the entire family to work on together Journal Track fun things your family does on the go and include pictures to remem
13. first contact s name that is used For example If Amy original entry is joined with Julie second entry Julie appears to disappear and only Amy remains Tap the Amy entry showing the Julie image to view both 5 Tap the main linked contact to view the contact information you linked The contacts and information displays with an icon next to the contact name to indicate what type of account information is contained in the entry Unjoining a Contact 1 From the Home screen tap a 2 Tap a contact name the account name from which you want to unjoin an entry This reveals the details for entry Note Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account information 3 Tap the Joined contacts area Press and then tap Separate contact 4 Tap next to the entry you want to unjoin The contacts are unjoined or separated and no longer display in the merged record screen Both contacts now go back to being separately displayed Marking a Contact as Default When you use applications such as the Voice Dialer or other messaging type applications the application needs to know which information is primary default in a contact entry list For example when you say Call John Smith if you have three phone records for John Smith the Voice dialer is looking for the default number or entry The Mark as default option marks one entry in a contact record to use as the default This comes in handy
14. Email Press and then tap Accounts Select an exchange email account Tap Inbox and tap Compose Enter the recipient s email address in the To field e Ifyou are sending the email message to several recipients separate the email addresses with a comma You can add as many message recipients as you want Press and then tap Add Cc Bcc to add additional carbon copy recipients e Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients e Use the Bce field to blind copy additional recipients Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject Tap the email text field and compose your email message e To add a picture attachment tap Attach from the bottom of the screen and make a category selection e Tap the file you wish to attach e Tap e to delete the attached file Note If you attach an image to your email you have the option to resize it prior to delivery Choose from Original Large 70 Medium 30 or Small 10 Once chosen tap OK 9 Once complete tap Send Deleting an Exchange Email Message p gt Touch and hold an email from your inbox list and select Delete from the on screen context menu With the email message displayed tap Delete Configuring Microsoft Exchange Email Settings 1 Press cay gt and then tap OP gt Accounts and sync Tap Q adjacent to the Microsoft Exchange account field to reveal the account s synchronization settings screen Toggle either the Sync Contac
15. To establish a L2TP IPSec PSK Pre shared key based L2TP IPSec 1 Establish a VPN name a name for this connection Set the VPN server Set IPsec pre shared key Enable L2TP secret Set L2TP secret oe 7 FY KN Set the DNS search domains Changing Your Settings 215 To establish a L2TP IPSec CRT Certificate based L2TP IPSec 1 Establish a VPN name a name for this connection Set the VPN server Enable L2TP secret Set L2TP secret Set user certificate g gt o p Note A user certificate must be installed to use this setting 6 Set CA certificate Note A CA certificate must be installed to use this setting 7 Set the DNS search domains Near Field Communication Near Field Communication NFC is used to read and exchange tags For more information refer to Tags on page 181 1 Press Ol gt and then tap Settings gt Wireless and network 2 Tap the NFC field A check mark displayed next to the feature indicating it is enabled 216 Mobile networks Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest you must enable the Mobile networks options p gt Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt Mobile networks The following options display Use packet data Allows you to activate data usage on your phone p gt Press fay gt and then tap Keys Settings gt Wireless and network gt Mobile ne
16. Understanding Your Device 33 e Primary Shortcuts are four shortcuts present throughout all of the available screens and can be used to both navigate within the device or launch any of the following functions Phone i launches the phone related screen functions Keypad Logs Contacts Favorites and Groups Contacts B launches the Contacts related screens Keypad Logs Contacts Favorites and Groups Messaging launches the Messaging menu create new messages or open an existing message string Applications Home toggles functionality between the Home and Application screens e Tap Applications to access the Application screens loaded with every available local application While in the Applications screens tap g Home to easily retum to the Home screen As you transition from screen to screen the screen counter located at the bottom displays the current panel number in a circle 34 Widget Counter displays the currently active screen Autoerartkally bacts up photos and videos ta your private aniline album where you can jew organize and share Screen Navigation Using the touch screen display and the keys you can navigate the features of your phone and enter characters The following conventions are used in this manual to describe the navigation action in the procedures Navigating Through the Screens The following terms describe the most common hardware and on screen actions Pre
17. on page 78 1 Press cay gt and then tap Ke gt Language and keyboard gt Swype 2 Tap Select Input Method to switch between keyboard types Choose from either Samsung keypad or Swype 3 Tap How to Swype to view an on screen manual for Swype 4 Tap Personal Dictionary to access and manage your personal dictionary 5 Tap Preferences to alter these settings Audio feedback turns on sounds generated by the Swype application e Vibrate on keypress activates a vibration sensation as you enter text using the keypad e Show tips turns on a flashing indicator for quick help e Auto spacing automatically inserts a space between words When you finish a word just lift your finger or stylus and start the next word e Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of a sentence Show complete trace once enabled sets wether or not to display the complete Swype path Word suggestion suggests words as you are typing e Speed vs accuracy sets how quickly Swype responds to on screen input Move the slider between Fast Response speed or Error Tolerant accuracy and tap OK e Reset Swype s dictionary once enabled deletes any words you have added to Swype s dictionary Locate the About section to review the Swype application information e Version lists the Swype version number Tap Language Options to activate and select the current text input language Default language is US English
18. 2 Press and then tap More gt Settings Applications gt 3 Choose from the following on screen options e Default zoom Adjusts the zoom feature Set to Far Medium or Close Open pages in overview Displays an overview of recently viewed web pages e Text encoding Adjusts the current text encoding e Block pop up windows Prevents popup advertisement or windows from appearing on screen Remove the checkmark to disable this function e Load images Allows web page images to load along with the other text components of a loaded website Auto fit pages Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much of the screen as possible e Landscape view only Displays the browser in only the horizontal position e Enable JavaScript Enables javascript for the current Web page Without this feature some pages may not display properly Remove the checkmark to disable this function e Enable plug ins Allows the download of plug ins such as Adobe Flash Open in background New pages are launched in a separate page and displayed behind the current one Remove the checkmark to disable this function e Set home page Sets the current home page for the Web browser e Default storage Sets the default storage to Memory card e Clear cache Deletes all currently cached data Tap OK to complete the process e Clear history Clears the browser navigation history Tap OK to complete the process e Accept cookies Allows
19. 3 Note 104 From the Home screen tap Aa gt Groups tab Press and then tap Create Groups tab Tap the Group name field and use the on screen keypad to enter a new group name For more information refer to Text Input Methods on page 77 Tap Ringtone and select a ringtone for the group Selections are Default ringtone Select sound from Files or Phone ringtone Tap Save to store the newly created group Some externally maintained group types such as Google can only be managed or updated remotely online vs via the phone These external types will not allow editing or deleting members locally via the phone Adding an Existing Entry to a Current Caller Group 1 2 3 4 From the Home screen tap 2 gt Groups tab Tap a group entry gt Add group member From the available list of contacts tap the contact s you want to add A check mark displays next to contact entry Tap Add The selected contacts are added to the group Removing an Entry From a Caller Group 1 PY DN pix From the Home screen tap 2 gt Groups tab Tap a group entry Press and then tap Remove member Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this group A checkmark displays next to contact entry Tap Remove The contacts are removed from the group Editing a Caller Group To edit a Group entry there must be at least one member as part of the selected group 1 2 3 4 2 From the Home sc
20. A 3 A biggest reason for this are background applications These are 3 Tap the Name field and enter a task name using the applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and are still keypad active but minimized The Task manager not only lets you see which 4 Tap the Due date field and enter a due date name using the of these applications are still active inthe background butalso easily lets you choose which applications are left running and which are keypad If there is no date that the task is due tap the No closed due date checkbox Shutting Down Applications 5 lf desired enter Task Priority Reminder and Notes then p gt From the Home screen tap td Applications gt tap Save A Task manager 6 At the Task list screen press to display the following or 182 options e Create allows you to create a new task e Delete allows you to delete one or all of your tasks e Search allows you to search your tasks for a particular word or words e List by allows you to sort by Due date Status or Priority Press and hold fay then tap Task manager This screen contains the following tabs e Active applications display those currently active applications running on your phone e Downloaded displays any installed packages or applications from the Market that are taking up memory space Tap Uninstall to remove them from your phone e RAM displays the amount of current RAM Random Access 4 Select to either Upgrade
21. Guidelines allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off Storage allows you to configure the default storage location for images or videos as either Phone or Memory card if inserted Reset allows you to resetall camera or camcorder settings to the default values Camera Camcorder Mode allows you to take a photo in various modes Once you change the mode the corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the display Slide the button up for Camera mode or down for Camcorder mode Camcorder button shoots or stops video recording when pressed in Camcorder mode the various viewing options for a selected video Image viewer options are described in the following section The last video you took will be displayed as a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon ka Image viewer allows you to access the Image viewer and Accessing Videos When you shoot a video the file is saved in the Camera folder You can view your videos immediately or view them anytime in the Camera folder 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt Gallery 2 Select a folder location and tap a video icon to begin video playback Or Touch and hold the video icon from the main Gallery to select the video green check mark and display the following video menu context options e Send via allows you to share a video using Bluetooth Email Gmail Messaging Wi Fi Kodak and Snapfish Delete allows you to delete choservselected
22. MY PRORG PEPEE T write act ece T T 102 Additional Contact Options 0000e 103 GROUPS EI EEE AE SES TT 104 The Favorites Tauira airaa e EEA 106 Section 7 Messages s sssssssssssrsssnnsrnnsnnsrnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnas 107 Types of Messages Creating and Sending Messages 0000 eee 107 Message Options c 0 00200 faethe demedet 108 Viewing Newly Received Messages 109 Deleting Messages cece cece eee eeees 111 Message Search 0c cece e rinra rErEri ya 112 Messaging Settings orars sasauranana cece cece eens 112 Text Templates ic hcvicuive towed a a chee wens 114 Email denoten aa oE 115 Microsoft Exchange Email Outlook o n aaaea 118 Using Google Mall ic o cced chee th ee a a a 123 Google Talk sc inrcr ine and eenae ieee enagaes 125 Section 8 Multimedia cccsssssesesseeeeseseseeeeseees 126 Using the Camera 0 ccc cece cece ririri 126 Camera Options ss cscasecdsesde ceeaas aves ghemeees 127 Using tho Camcorder est c 0 sl os be edad naiai 132 PRO EGHOR 26 5 5 2iocs ste ceesteeeitee eccrine Seas dee eai 135 File Siapno aeons ee urteaestauesenauanheaneens 136 TMG GallG Ny OE E E E oa ew Get ears 137 Using the Video Player ccc eee eee eens 138 Media HUD i fen dree a oen Sellen eee E E a totes 140 Music Google Music 0 cece cece eee 143 MUSIC Player 2xicco adeadoiaaddeaaban enone ek 147 Using
23. This Privacy Policy is effective as of May 29 2010 and complies with Samsung s Corporate Privacy Policy We reserve the right to change this Privacy Policy at any time and will post any such changes to this Privacy Policy on the Social Hub website Please refer back to the Social Hub website on a regular basis to obtain the most up to date Privacy Policy Social Hub End User License Agreement 1 SOCIAL HUB This end user license License allows you to use Social Hub Software made available on your mobile device This License is a legally binding agreement between you and Samsung Electronics Co Ltd the Licensor 2 LICENSE 2 1 Licensor grants you for the term of this License a limited personal non exclusive non transferable license to use the Software in object code executable only form on a single device for non commercial uses 2 2 All rights not expressly granted to you under this License are reserved to Licensor and you agree not to take or permit any action with respect to the Software that is not expressly authorised under this License For the avoidance of doubt you have no right to use incorporate into other products copy modify translate or transfer to any third party the Software or any modification adaptation or copy of the Software or any part thereof nor to decompile reverse engineer or disassemble the binary code of the Software either in whole or in part except as expressly provided in this Lic
24. alarm at the end of the countdown 3 Tap Start to start the timer 4 Tap Stop to stop the timer or Reset to reset the timer and start over 5 Tap Restart to resume the timer counter Configuring a Desk Clock This feature lets you activate an on screen clock that can be viewed when the device is docked p From the Home screen tap Clock gt Desk clock tab Applications gt Time Management 209 Section 12 Changing Your Settings This section explains the sound and phone settings for your device Itincludes such settings as display security memory and any extra settings associated with your phone Wireless and Networks Using Airplane mode Airplane mode Flight mode allows you to use many of your phone s features such as Camera Games and more when you are in an airplane or in any other area where making or receiving Calls or data is prohibited Important When your phone is in Airplane mode it cannot send or receive any calls or access online information or applications 1 Press fay gt and then tap sO Settings gt Wireless and network 2 Tap Airplane mode A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates Airplane mode is active 210 Activating Wi Fi 1 Press fay gt and then tap sO Settings gt Wireless and network gt Wi Fi settings 2 Tap Wi Fi A check mark displayed indicates Wi Fi is active Wi Fi settings Once set up for Wi Fi connectivity your phone aut
25. calls and other actions This list identifies the icons you see on your phone s display screen Indicator Icons This list identifies the symbols you ll see on your phone s display and Indicator area Displays your current signal strength The greater the number of bars the stronger the signal Indicates that the Airplane mode is active You cannot send or receive any calls or access online information ERAN SEQ Indicates there is no signal available Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone Displays when there is a system error or alert Displays if you have not setup the automatic software update feature For more information refer to Software Update on page 246 Displays when a call is in progress Displays when a call is on hold Displays when you have missed an incoming call Displays when the speakerphone is on Displays when the microphone is muted i i Re Bea seo Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always forward For more information refer to Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 221 Displays your current battery charge level Icon shown is fully charged Displays your current battery is 100 percent charged This icon is followed by an audible beep Displays your battery is currently charging Displays your current battery charge level is very low Shows your current battery only has three percent power remaining and will immediat
26. commercial items consisting of commercial software and commercial software documentation with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein All Software and Products provided to the United States Government pursuant to solicitations issued on or after December 1 1995 is provided with the commercial rights and 276 restrictions described elsewhere herein All Software and Products provided to the United States Government pursuant to solicitations issued prior to December 1 1995 are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS as provided for in FAR 48 CFR 52 227 14 JUNE 1987 or DFAR 48 CFR 252 227 7013 OCT 1988 as applicable 13 APPLICABLE LAW This EULA is governed by the laws of TEXAS without regard to conflicts of laws principles This EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods the application of which is expressly excluded If a dispute controversy or difference is not amicably settled it shall be finally resolved by arbitration in Seoul Korea in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial Arbitration Board The award of arbitration shall be final and binding upon the parties 14 ENTIRE AGREEMENT SEVERABILITY This EULA is the entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications proposals and representations with res
27. first need to deactivate those features before you can make an emergency call Consult your User Manual and your local cellular service provider When making an emergency call remember to give all the necessary information as accurately as possible Remember that your mobile device may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident do not cut off the call until given permission to do so 260 Care and Maintenance Your mobile device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care The suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many years Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from Liquids of any kind Keep the mobile device dry Precipitation humidity and liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits If the mobile device does get wet do not accelerate drying with the use of an oven microwave or dryer because this may damage the mobile device and could cause a fire or explosion Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand Doing so may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the mobile device Extreme heat or cold Avoid temperatures below 0 C 32 F or above 45 C 113 F Microwaves Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven Doing so may cause a fire or explosion Dust and dirt Do not expose your mobile device to dust dirt or sand Cleaning solutions Do not use har
28. or 4 2 3 which you can demonstrate is in the public domain other than as a result of a breach of this clause 4 4 3 To the extent that any information is necessarily disclosed pursuant to a statutory or regulatory obligation or court order such disclosure shall not be a breach of this clause 4 provided you do what you can to prevent any such disclosure 5 WARRANTY AND SUPPORT The Software is provided as is with no representation guarantee or warranty of any kind as to its functionality or that it does not and will not infringe any third party rights including intellectual property rights Licensor has no obligation under this License to provide technical or other support to you Warranty Information 289 6 LIMITATION AND EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY 6 1 Licensor does not exclude its liability if any to you 6 1 1 for personal injury or death resulting from Licensor s negligence 6 1 2 for fraud or 6 1 3 for any matter for which it would be illegal for Licensor to exclude or to attempt to exclude its liability 6 2 LICENSOR MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND LICENSOR HEREBY EXCLUDES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMISSIBLE IN LAW ALL CONDITIONS WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT ITS OPERATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE AND STIPULATIONS EXPRESS OTHER THAN THOSE SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE OR IMPLIED STATUTORY CUSTOM
29. p Tap the name of the current song in the Now Playing bar Tap Music notification icon in the System bar and in the Status Details opens tap the song title You can also pause and resume playback and skip to the next or previous song in the panel For more information refer to Notification Bar on page 28 Tab Options There are various options available from the various tabs 1 From the Home screen tap cd Applications gt Music Select one of the following tabs and tap k to access an available option e RECENT to display the most recently played songs and albums e ARTISTS Play Add to playlist or Shop for artist e ALBUMS Play Add to playlist More by artist Shop for artist or Search e SONGS Play Add to playlist Delete Shop for artist Delete or Search e PLAYLIST Play Rename or Edit GENRES Play Add to playlist More by artist Shop for artist or Search Multimedia 145 Options While Playing a Song When you play a song the Now playing screen displays There are various options and controls available while a song is playing 1 146 From the Home screen tap Music Tap an album or song Applications gt Press Menu to display the following options Show options View additional playback features such as shuffle and repeat e Settings Allows you to view information such as Open source lincenses Help and Music version Tap gt Add to playlist to ad
30. printers and wireless devices The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to approximately 30 feet Turning Bluetooth On and Off To turn Bluetooth on 1 Press fay gt and then tap Ke Settings gt Wireless and network gt Bluetooth settings 2 Tap the Bluetooth field to activate the feature checkmark indicates active When active displays in the Status area To turn Bluetooth off 1 Press fay gt and then tap Settings gt Wireless and network gt Bluetooth settings 2 Tap the Bluetooth field to deactivate the feature 194 Bluetooth Status Indicators The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status at a glance Displays when Bluetooth is active Displays when Bluetooth is connected paired and rp communicating Bluetooth Settings The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the characteristics of your device s Bluetooth service including e Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth communication and description e Setting your device s visibility or discoverability for other Bluetooth devices e Displaying your device s Bluetooth address To access the Bluetooth Settings menu 1 Press fay gt and then tap Settings gt Wireless and network gt Bluetooth settings 2 Verify Bluetooth is active Indicated by a green check mark in the Bluetooth field 3 Tap the Device name Visible Visible time out and Search for dev
31. 2 Tap Use wireless networks to enable GPS to determine location based on nearby cell towers 3 Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite 4 Tap Use sensor aiding to enhance positioning and save power using sensors Tip When using Google Maps you can turn on Enable GPS satellites Selecting GPS satellites allows you to locate places of interest at the street level However this also requires a clear view of the sky and uses more battery power Opening Maps 1 3 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt iM Maps Locate the top row of the applications to access additional options e Search Maps allows you to search for a place of interest e Layers allows you to switch map views Traffic available only in selected areas Real time traffic conditions are displayed over roads as color coded lines Each color represents how fast the traffic is moving Satellite Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth Satellite images are not real time Google Earth acquires the best imagery available most of which is approximately one to three years old Terrain combines a topographical view of the area s terrain with the Current map location Transit Lines displays the overlapping transit lines on your map Latitude allows you to see your friend s locations and share your location with them My Maps displays a list of your preferred maps Bicycling displays the over
32. 225 Screen Rotation Auto Rotate 226 Screen Timeout 226 Screens Adding and Deleting 48 Customizing 47 Rearranging 48 SD card Connecting to 54 Disconnect Storage 54 Mounting the 54 Unmounting 55 Search Engine 193 Select Language 240 Sending a Namecard 98 Set as Contact icon 131 Home Screen Wallpaper 131 Lock Screen Wallpaper 131 Setting an alarm 207 Setting up Voicemail 17 Settings 210 Browser 192 Contact list 103 Display 24 Enabling the GPS Satellites 228 Enabling the sensor aiding 228 Enabling wireless network locations 228 Messaging 112 303 Setup Initial 14 Severe Alert Disable 114 Shortcuts Adding from Application Screen 49 Adding from Home Screen 50 Deleting from a Screen 50 Managing 49 Primary 34 Siignature Adding 118 Silent Mode 223 SIM Card Changing Exisitng PIN 231 Importing and Exporting 103 Insertion 9 Lock 230 Removal 9 SIM Card Lock Setting Up 230 Smart Practices While Driving 254 304 Snooze 208 SNS 101 SNS Friends Viewing 94 Social Hub 277 Social Network Adding Facebook Contacts 101 Resync 102 Social Networking Adding Contacts From 101 Software Update Wi Fi 246 Song Set as 149 Sounds Screen Lock 225 Speakerphone Turning on and off 70 Specific Absorption Rate SAR Certifi cation Information 252 Speed Dial Changing an entry 65 Making a call 65 Removing an entry 65 Setting up entries 64 Spell Correction 86 Standard Limited Warranty 268 Status Bar 24 Storage Usage
33. 234 Streaming Movies 175 Sub Menus Navigation 37 Switching to a Bluetooth During a call 70 Swype 123ABC Mode 81 Entering Text 78 Preferences 78 240 Reset Dictionary 79 241 Settings 78 240 Sync Books 236 Sync Tasks 237 System Volume Setting 224 T Tags 181 TalkBack 244 Task 182 Text Input Methods 77 Text Input Method Selecting 77 Text Templates 114 Create Your Own 115 Text To Speech 243 Text to speech Configuration 243 Third Party Applications 233 Uninstalling 166 Time Management Calendar 206 T Mobile Mall 179 Tools Camera 126 Transferring Music Files 151 TTS 243 TTY Mode 220 Twitter Video Chat 180 U UL Certified Travel Charger 258 Understanding Your Phone 20 Back View 23 Display 24 Features 20 Front View 21 Home 32 Uninstalling Third party applications 166 Unknown Sources 141 166 232 Unmounting SD card 55 Usage Battery 234 Storage 234 USB Mass Storage 214 Utilities 198 214 USB Connections As mass storage device 198 USB Debugging 235 Disable 230 USB Settings As mass storage device 198 USB Tethering 202 214 Activating 203 Active Icon 203 Disconnecting 203 Use GPS Satellites 162 228 Use Packet Data 216 Use Sensor Aiding 162 228 Use Wireless Networks 162 228 Using Favorites Adding Favorites 191 Deleting a Favorite 191 Editing Favorites 191 V Vibration 223 Setup 223 Video Calling see Google Talk 125 Video Chat 180 Recording Video 181 Settings 180 Videos Options 130 Visible 214
34. GPS Navigator on page 183 Utility This application houses some ofthe most commonly used utility applications such as Memo Task Videos Voice Command and Voice Recorder For more information refer to Utility on page 183 Understanding Your Device 45 46 Videos Launches your device s built in video application that plays video files stored on your microSD card This application is found in the Utility application folder For more information refer to Using the Video Player on page 138 Visual Voicemail Visual Voicemail enables users to view alist of people who left a voicemail message and listen to the any message they want without being limited to chronological order For more information refer to Visual Voicemail on page 18 Voice Command Allows you to use your voice to perform operations that you would normally have to do by hand such as dialing a phone number texting a message playing music etc This application is found in the Utility application folder For moreinformation referto Using Voice Command on page 61 g e S Q Voice Recorder Allows you to record an audio file up to one minute long and then immediately send it as a message This application is found in the Utility application folder For more information refer to Voice Recorder on page 184 Voice Search Launches your phone s built in voice recognition software and initiates a Google search
35. Home screen tap Contacts 2 Locate an entry then touch and hold it from the screen and select Add to reject list All phone numbers associated with this entry are then added to the reject list To assign single numbers as rejected via Auto reject list 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Ke Settings gt Call gt Call rejection gt Auto reject list 2 Tap Add and either enter the phone number or select a Contact from your Logs or Contacts list 3 Tap Save to complete the assignment Using Voice Command This application allows you to use your voice to perform operations that you would normally have to do by hand such as dialing a phone number texting a message playing music etc 1 From the Home screen tap Utility gt Voice command Applications gt 7 2 Read the Samsung Disclaimer and tap Confirm to continue Read the Vlingo Terms of Service then tap Agree to continue Read the information on the How to use Samsung Mow to Use Samsung voite Speak to get things done voice screen then tap Confirm Read the information on the What can I say screen then tap Finish 4 Tap amp Speak U Go completely hands free Listen to new notifications ae Sle 7 At the Voice talk screen scroll across the screen to view some of the sample icons for assistance in using Voice command s re Tap Tap amp Speak to say what you would like to do Follow the on screen instr
36. My device tab select Videos Photos or Music and then tap on the media that you would like to share 2 At the Select device screen any devices that you can share with are displayed 3 Tap on a device to share media Receiving Media via AllShare 1 Tap the Remote device tab at the top of the screen All devices that you can receive media from are displayed 2 Tap a device name Media that you can receive from the other device is listed e Tap an item that you want to stream to your phone 3 Press to return to the previous page Books Use Google Books to read over 3 million ebooks on the go Build your ebooks library in the cloud with Google Books jump right into a bestseller or select from nearly 3 million free ebooks Personalize the reader to your liking pick up reading where you left off on your phone or computer and settle down with a great book on your Android phone Note This application might be updated after connection This would require a user to follow the on screen instructions to update the related application icon and features 1 From the Home screen tap cd Applications gt Y Books 2 If prompted tap Turn sync on This synchronizes your books you have previously selected between your Books account and your device 3 Tap fey to begin searching for both free and paid ebooks 4 Follow the on screen prompts to download the ebook to your phone Applications and Development 155 Calculator Us
37. Playlists 2 soscson Bile EnA Gates tine Gack 149 Greating a Playlist csescced ose enc eg eapasa dade a d sete a yeeen 149 Transferring Music Files 0 00 c cece cece aee 151 Removing Music Files 0 cccceeeeeeeee 151 Launching an Installed Google Application 165 TE MOD IGT sie ass sof sizes coscsesite E E A A 151 Android Development ccc cece eee ee 166 VOUTUDG s so ecnin aana uE aai 152 Media HU c 0820 hc radeadasndeawdnes deme does G 167 Section 9 Applications and Development 153 MEMO Sd aaite gerea tes eter meats otal E 167 Applications 2 0 0 cece cece eee ences 153 Messaging cists cas area ee aa oa pee Ts 168 AUT CEMONG i boston rirlneen Yo dammed eatin ar 153 MobileLife Organizer 0 ese e eee eens 168 Accounts and SWC ss 6ss cece s ese eae edad yinin anmi 153 MOG for ME arei ied we peated enii iaee 170 E PO E NE AEAEE AE 154 Music Google Music seeren rason ao 171 aa AEE EE E E 155 MUSIC ie sun e e mabe ieee Mee E Se 171 Calcular cafevercierainy sou odin aneunrgs EREA NERE E VEEE 156 My ACCOUNT terpreti osni nirikuna EE Nh 171 Calenda sics oe Foie sods Ura TAARA EEE COSAK 156 My DEVICE i ononaria a an ia AEA 172 COMPACTS ct ot EE EEEE 157 Navigation s ironinen ie aE a e eae 173 CAM E E AE 157 NO pennaa a E EERE A E ERA 175 GIOCKS ics ceyaceecnc tenner beam omen EEEE AE ONV 157 NewS amp Weather ssc cisinssternsomminsmniunentmnaet
38. Remove and then slide the microSD slot cover off to reveal the slot 3 Orient the card with the gold strips facing up towards the battery cover and away from the screen 4 Firmly press the card into the slot and make sure that it catches with the push click insertion For more information on how to use the SD card see Using the SD Card on page 53 Important Be sure to align the gold contact pins on the card with the phone s contacts Incorrect Correct 10 Removing the microSD Memory Card 1 Slide the microSD slot cover off to reveal the slot 2 Firmly press the card into the slot and release it The card should pop partially out of the slot 3 Remove the card from the slot 4 Replace the battery cover Battery Before using your phone for the first time install the battery and charge it fully Important Before removing or replacing the battery cover make sure the phone is switched off To turn the phone off hold down the WEO key until the power off image displays then tap Power off Installing the Battery 1 Slide the battery into the compartment 1 so that the tabs on the end align with the slots at the bottom of the phone making sure the connectors align 2 Gently press down to secure the battery 2 Removing the Battery Charging the Battery p gt Insert your finger into the removal groove 3 and lift it up Your phone is powered by a rechargeable Li ion battery A wall and out of the b
39. Terms including all documents comprising the Terms constitute the entire agreement between you and Samsung and supersedes any prior agreement between you and Samsung with respect to your use of the Service Your use of any third party content or service accessed via the Service will be governed by the terms and conditions furnished with and applicable to that content or service If any provision of the Terms is held invalid illegal or unenforceable that portion of the Terms shall be construed in a manner consistent with applicable law to reflect as nearly as possible the original intentions of the parties and the remaining portion of the Terms shall remain in full force and effect Samsung s failure to enforce any right or provision of the Terms will not constitute a waiver of such provision or any other provision of the Terms Samsung will not be liable or responsible for any failure to fulfill any of its obligations under the Terms which failure is due to any cause or condition beyond the reasonable control of Samsung If there is any conflict between these Social Hub Terms and Conditions and the Social Hub Privacy Policy the provisions of these Social Hub Terms and Conditions shall prevail The provisions of the Terms that are intended to or by their nature should survive termination of your use of the Service shall remain valid after any such termination Social Hub Privacy Policy Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Samsung is co
40. The calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions addition subtraction multiplication and division You can also use this as a scientific calculator For more information refer to Calculator on page 156 Calendar aunches a calendar application that syncs to your Facebook Google or Microsoft Exchange work calendars For more information refer to Calendar on page 206 Understanding Your Device 39 40 Camera Launches the built in 5 0 megapixel camera application from where you can take a picture with either the front or rear facing cameras Note An SD card is no longer needed to take pictures or shoot video since there is already 4GB built in storage In addition to taking photos the built in camera also doubles as a camcorder that also allows you to record view and send high definition videos For more information refer to Using the Camera on page 126 For more information refer to Using the Camcorder on page 132 Contacts The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts List is your phone s built in memory For more information referto Contacts List on page 89 Koy Clock Allows you to set an alarm configure and view the World clock use a stopwatch set a timer or Desk clock The applications display in a tabular format and quickly accessed with the touch of a finger For more information refer to Clocks on page 207 Downl
41. Wi Fi settings 2 Tap the Wi Fi field to deactivate the feature The checkmark grays or Activate and Deactiavte Wi Fi from the Notification bar Note Use of wireless data connections such as Wi Fi and Bluetooth can reduce battery life and use times Manually Scan for a Wi Fi Network 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and networks gt Wi Fi settings 2 Press and then tap Scan Wi Fi Status Indicators The following icons indicate the Wi Fi connection status Ge Displays when Wi Fi is connected active and oR communicating with a Wireless Access Point WAP Displays when Wi Fi is active and there is an available open wireless network Ge Displays when Wi Fi is configured for a direct ey connection to another compatible device in the same direct communication mode Wi Fi Advanced Settings The Wi Fi settings Advanced menu allows you to set up many of the device s Wi Fi services including e Setting the Wi Fi sleep policy e Viewing the device s MAC Address e Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP To access the Wi Fi Advanced Settings menu 1 Press fay gt and then tap sO Settings gt Wireless and network gt Wi Fi settings 2 Press and then tap Advanced USB Tethering This option allows you to share your phone s mobile data connection via a direct USB connection between your phone and computer A wireless version of this same functionality would be the Mobile
42. accounts managed by the device These must be manually added To manage an existing Google account 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Accounts and sync 2 Tap Add account gt Google 3 Tap Next gt Sign in Note If you do not already have a Google account tap Create and follow the on screen prompts to create your new account 4 Tap the Username gmail com and Password fields and enter your information 5 Tap Signin Your phone then communicates with the Google servers to confirm your information Your existing Gmail account then appears within the Manage accounts area of the screen e Any changes or updates to your Gmail account are then automatically updated to your device 236 To configure the Google management settings 1 Press fay gt and then tap Settings gt Accounts and sync Tap within the Google account field to reveal the account s synchronization settings screen Tap the parameters you wish to synchronize Sync Books Sync Contacts Sync Gmail or Sync Calendar A green checkmark indicates the feature is enabled Press to return to the previous screen For more information refer to Synchronizing Contacts on page 100 Synchronizing Your Corporate Account By default there are no Corporate Calendar events managed by the device These must be manually added Note Once a corporate email account is created it is automatically added as a managed account
43. active Wi Fi connection Applications and Development 175 News amp Weather The News amp Weather application allows you to view the news and weather in your area 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt a News amp Weather 2 Select from any of the available tabs Weather Top Stories U S Sports and Entertainment 3 Tap the temperature to display a graph mapping the days temperature and humidity 4 While on the Weather screen press to display the following options e Refresh allows you to refresh the screen Your location and the weather is updated if there have been any changes e Settings allows you to set weather news and refresh settings Weather settings allows you to choose location s and set the metric for temperature displays News settings allows you to choose topics configure settings for fetching articles and images and view the terms of service for news service Refresh settings allows you to choose options for updating content Application version displays the application version number 176 To access the settings 1 Press and then tap Settings 2 Tap an available option Weather settings News settings Refresh settings and Application version Photo Editor This application provides basic editing functions for pictures that you take on your phone Along with basic image tuning like brightness contrast and color it also provides a wide variety of effects
44. album Changing Music Settings 1 144 artist or playlist to view a list of its songs From the Home screen tap td Applications gt C Music Press and then tap Shuffle all e Shuffle all Play all songs in a random order Listening to Music You can listen to music by using your device s built in speakers through a wired headset or through a wireless Bluetooth stereo headset Press the volume keys on the side of the device to activate on screen volume control then touch and drag on the scale to set volume Playing Music 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt P Music Tap a song in your library to listen to it or While viewing a list of songs tap inns next to a song and tap Play sors While viewing a list of albums artists playlists or genres the label area _ under an item and tap Play The Now playing screen opens and the song you touched or the first song in the album or playlist starts to play The tracks in the current list play in order until you reach the end of the list unless you choose a repeat option Otherwise playback stops only if you stop it even when you switch applications Note If you navigate away from the Now playing screen in the Music application the Now Playing bar appears at the bottom of the screen Displaying the Now Playing Screen If you navigate away from the Now playing screen to return to the Now playing screen from other Music screens
45. appear within the Notifications area of the status bar when a new Internet mail Gmail etc is received e Select ringtone Plays a selected ringtone when a new email message is received e Vibration Activates a vibration when a new email message is received e Incoming settings Lets you specify incoming email settings such as User name Password IMAP server Security type Port and IMAP path prefix e Outgoing settings Lets you specify outgoing email settings such as SMTP server Security type Port Require sign in User name or Password e Forward with files Lets you include attachments when forwarding an email e Set first line view type allows you to configure what is displayed in the first line of the email display Choose from either Subject or Sender Microsoft Exchange Email Outlook Your phone also provides access to your company s Outlook Exchange server If your company uses either Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 or 2007 you can use this email application to wirelessly synchronize your email Contacts and Calendar information directly with your company s Exchange server Setting Up a Microsoft Exchange Email account 1 From the Home screen tap td gt Email 2 If you already have other email account setup e Tap the account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page e Press and then tap Add account Account name Educators Save on B 3 07 AM
46. ask that you select a recipient for your video segment Tags This application is used for organizing and sharing Near Field Communication NFC tags You can scan a tag by turning on your device and placing it near the tag For more information refer to Near Field Communication on page 216 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt NI Tags 2 Read the on screen tutorial screen and follow the navigation instructions Turning on the NFC feature p From the Home screen tap Applications gt Settings gt Wireless and network gt NFC Talk You can instant message with Google Talk Google Talk allows you to communicate with other people who are also connected with Google Talk on the phone or on the web p From the Home screen tap Applications gt alk Talk For more information refer to Google Talk on page 125 Applications and Development 181 Task e Sync Task allows you to sync your tasks to any of your accounts Allows you to keep track of both your current and upcoming From the Task list screen tap a task once you have completed it tasks You can also sync these tasks with different accounts and a checkmark appears next to the task The task name is also 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt grayed out so that you can still read it Utility gt Task Task Manager Sometimes your phone might seem to slow down over time and the 2 Tap Create task to start a new task entry
47. based on the recognized text For more information refer to Voice Search on page 185 Voice talk Launches your phone s built in voice recognition system that allows you to initiate several common tasks without having to touch the phone Features include Call Text Navigate Play music Memo and Driving mode For more information refer to Voice Talk on page 185 Web Open the browser to start surfing the web The browser is fully optimized and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone For more information refer to Web on page 188 Yelp Launches the Yelp application that provides access to an online urban city guide that helps people find cool places to eat shop drink relax and play Its the fun and easy way to find review and talk about what s great in your world For more information refer to Yelp on page 185 YouTube Launches the YouTube webpage via the browser For more information refer to YouTube on page 152 Zinio Launches a digital magazine reader Zinio has transformed your favorite print magazines into digital format For more information refer to Zinio on page 186 Customizing the Screens You can customize the Home screens panels to display the Widgets Shortcuts Folders or Wallpapers For example one screen could contain the Music Player shortcut and other forms of media while another screen might cont
48. by Name 100 Export List to microSD 198 238 Filtering 101 Given Name First 100 Groups 104 Import Export 94 Last Name First 100 Merge with Google 94 Reject List 95 Send Namecard Via 95 Sending 98 Sending All 98 Setting Default Location 94 Settings 103 Video Chat 180 Contacts List 56 Context Menus 92 95 Navigation 38 Using 38 Cookies Emptying 192 Copying Contact 99 Corporate Email Account Syncronization 237 Add Account 237 Creating a Playlist 149 Creating and sending Messages 107 Customizing Home screens 47 D Data Roaming 216 Activate Deactivate 216 Deleting Message Thread 111 Multiple messages 111 Single message 111 Deleting a contact 93 Desk Clock Configuring 209 Device Administration Activation 120 Disconnect Storage 54 Display Icons 24 Settings 24 Status Bar 24 Display Touch Screen 258 Displaying your phone number 56 DivX Locating VOD Number 138 Overview 138 Registering Your DivX Device 138 Registration Code 245 Do cell phones pose a health hazard 248 Dock Audio Output Mode 244 Downloading New application 164 Downloads 158 Internet Downloads 158 Other Downloads 158 E EDGE Network 217 Email 115 Composing 117 Configuring Settings 117 Creating an Internet Account 115 Internet Email 115 Opening 116 Opening Internet Email 116 Refreshing Messages 117 Sending 103 Signature 118 Emergancy Alerts 113 Emergency Alert Configuration 114 Emergency Calls 259 Making 57 With SIM 58 With
49. by name or number Send message allows you to create a new text message to the selected entry e Time provides the time and date of the call and its duration e Create contact to save the number if it is not already in your Contacts e Update existing to add the number to an existing Contacts entry e Touch and hold an entry to display the entry specific context menu e Call Number to redial the current phone number Send message allows you to create a new text message to the selected entry e Edit number before call to make alterations to the current phone number prior to redial e Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not already in your Contacts e View contact to view the information for the currently stored Contacts entry e Send log info to send the Log entry information via text message e Add to reject list to add the current phone number to an automatic rejection list Similar to a block list the selected caller will be blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone e Delete to delete the entry from the Logs list Altering Numbers from the Logs List If you need to make a call from the Logs screen and you need to alter the number prior to dialing you can add the appropriate prefix by prepending the number 1 From the Home screen tap ny gt 2l 2 Touch and hold an entry to access the entry specific context menu 3 Tap Edit number before call 4 Edit the number using the on screen keypad
50. call Displays when there is an error in the use or 911 registration of the Wi Fi Calling feature Displays when your action is required to activate the Wi Fi Calling feature Can also display if your SIM needs to be configured for 911 service Displays when you are asked to review device specific support information from within your My Device application Displays when your phone is connected to a PC using Kies air Displays when your phone is connected to a Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA certified device using the AllShare application Displays in the notifications window when a song is currently playing within the Music Player Displays in the notifications window when a song is currently playing within the Google Music application Displays when your phone s GPS is on and communicating Understanding Your Device 27 EZG pc Displays when the external SD card internal microSD has been disconnected unmounted from the phone and is now ready for either removal or formatting Displays when the contents of the microSD card are being scanned Displays when the External SD card is being prepared for mounting to the device This is required for communication with the External SD card Displays when the phone s microSD card has been improperly removed Displays when the phone has detected an active USB connection and is in a USB Debugging mode Displays when Power saving mode is enabled Displays whe
51. call is in progress To place a call on hold 1 Tap Hold to place the current call on hold 2 Tap Unhold to activate the call that is on hold Call Functions and Contacts List 69 To make a new call while a call is in progress 1 Enter the new phone number that you wish to dial or look it up in Call history 2 Tap Add call to dial the second call 3 Dial the new phone number and tap mom To switch between the two calls p gt Tap Swap The In call number turns gray and displays On hold The active call displays a green background behind the number Turning the Speakerphone on and off While on a call you can use your Speakerphone by following these steps 1 Tap E Speaker off to turn the speakerphone on 2 Tap E Speaker on to turn the speakerphone off Tip When the speaker is turned On the color of the speaker is green When the speaker is turned Off the color of the speaker is gray 70 Muting a Call 1 Tap Mute off to turn mute on so the other caller cannot hear you speaking 2 Tap mee Mute on to turn mute off and resume your conversation Switching to Bluetooth Headset 1 Pair the target Bluetooth headset prior to your call 2 While on a call switch to the Bluetooth headset instead of speaker by tapping Headset 3 At the prompt tap Turn on to enable Bluetooth if it is not already activated More In call Options During a call you can save the current caller s information to the Contac
52. conversation 71 Multi party call Setting up 71 Multi party calls 71 Music 171 Adding Music 149 Creating a Playlist 149 Editing a Playlist 150 Making a Song a Ringtone 148 Options 149 Player 147 Playing Music 147 Removing Music 150 Using Playlists 149 Music App Adding Songs to Playlists 147 Changing Library View 143 Changing Settings 144 Creating a Playlist 147 Deleting a Playlist 147 Listening 144 Now Playing Screen 145 Options While Playing 146 Playing 144 Playing a Playlist 147 Registration 143 Searching for Music 144 Tab Options 145 Music Files Removing 151 Transferring 151 My Profile 102 N Namecard Send Via 98 Sending 98 Sending All 98 Navigating Application Menus 37 Sub Menus 37 Through Screens 35 Netflix 175 Network connection Adding a new 201 Network Mode 2G Network 217 3G Network 218 New applications Downloading 164 301 News amp Weather 176 NFC Turning On 181 NFC Near Field Communication 216 Non Market Applications 166 Notification Ringtone 224 Vibration Setting 224 Volume Setting 224 Notification Bar 28 Using 28 O On Off Switch 15 Operating Environment 263 Organizer Calculator 156 World Clock 209 Other Downloads 158 Other Important Safety Information 267 Out of Office Message 122 Settings 122 Outlook 115 Synchronizing 237 302 Overview Home Screen 32 P Pause Dialing 63 Personal Localized Alerting Network PLAN 254 Phone Icons 24 Switching
53. customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine Samsung accessories Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only important for safety it benefits the environment Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly Recycling programs for your mobile device batteries and accessories may not be available in your area We ve made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung mobile device by working with respected take back companies in every state in the country Drop It Off You can drop off your Samsung branded mobile device and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Samsung Recycling Direct SM locations A list of these locations may be found at http pages samsung com us recyclingdirect usactivities environment_samsungrecyclinadirect _locations jsp Samsung branded devices and batteries will be accepted at Mail It In The Samsung Mobile Take Back Program will provide Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label Just go to http www samsung com us aboutsamsung citizenship usactivities environment_samsungrecyclinadirect html INT STA_r ecyle_your_phone_page and follow the instructions to print out a free pre paid postage label and then send your old mobile device or battery to the address listed via U S Mail for recycling Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved recycler To find the nearest recycling location go to our website Www samsung com recyclingd
54. field unchecked can prevent connection 8 If your connection fails you can be prompted to manually update or re enter your Exchange server information within the appropriate field This field can often be populated with incorrect or out of date information Exchange Server your exchange server remote email address Typically starts with mail XXX com Obtain this information from your company network administrator Important Do not accept the default entry as this is a guess based on returned information 9 With the new server information entered tap Next 10 Read the on screen activation disclaimer and if prompted tap OK 120 Important If prompted to accept Remote security administration by your server tap OK 11 Adjust the various on screen configuration fields and tap Next 12 Identify your new work email account with a unique name Ex Work then tap Done Important If prompted to activate Device administration by your server tap Activate Opening an Exchange Email 1 From the Home screen tap td gt 6 Email 2 Tap the account name field upper right to open the complete email account list page 3 Select an exchange email account and tap an email message Refreshing Exchange Email 1 From the Home screen tap td gt Email 2 Select an exchange email account 3 Press and then tap Refresh Composing Exchange Email 1 2 3 4 5 From the Home screen tap td gt
55. gt j and then tap OP Settings gt Storage gt Unmount SD card 2 Press 3 Tap Format SD card gt Format SD card gt Erase everything to format the SD card The SD card formats and erases all the data stored on it Factory Data Reset From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to the factory default settings 1 Press ay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Privacy 2 Tap Factory data reset This action erases all data from your device except current system software and bundled applications or SD card files such as music or photos Note This feature provides an option to format the internal USB storage not the microSD card 3 Tap Format USB storage to erase all data stored on the device s internal storage area 4 Tap Reset phone gt Erase everything Memory Card 55 Section 4 Call Functions and Contacts List This section describes features and functionality associated with making or answering calls and the Contacts list which is used to store contact information Displaying Your Phone Number p gt Press cay gt and then tap OP Settings gt About phone gt Status Your phone number displays in the My phone number field Note The phone s Settings menu can also be activated by pressing A and then tapping cd Applications gt Settings Making a Call You can store phone numbers that are regularly used to the SIM card or to the phone s memory These entries are
56. it 5 Scroll through the media listings and tap on an item you would like to purchase or rent 6 Tap tap Buy or Rent 7 Choose a payment method and then follow the on screen instructions The media stores to the My Media folder Media Hub Notices Any media item Media Content may be rented or purchased after you create an account in Media Hub Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on up to five 5 devices with Media Hub that are also registered to the same account You may choose to remove a device from your account no more than once every 90 days e You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as you d like You will have the ability to re download the Media Content at a later point in time subject to content re download availability and studio permissions You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you have acquired through the Service e You can use 3G 4G or Wi Fi connectivity in order to download Media Content 142 Unlike purchased Media Content rented Media Content will be viewable on only 1 device in your account Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card e Your Media Content may pause stop or not download in networks where there is a weak signal You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a license acquisition has occurred and b sufficient amount of the Media Content has been buffered You must finish watching rented Media Cont
57. letters and a few common punctuation marks from the on screen keyboard The text mode key shows tee 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard 2 Tap to configure the keyboard for 123ABC mode showing letters and numbers on the onscreen keys Once in this mode the text input type shows Ea Note After typing an initial uppercase character the key changes to and all letters that follow are in lower case 3 Swipe your finger continuously over the letters to form a word If you make a mistake tap al to erase a single character Touch and hold KJ to erase an entire word 4 Tap Send to send the message All lowercase t Displays when the next character is entered in lowercase Pressing this while in 123SYM mode reveals additional numeric symbols keys Initial Uppercase Displays when the first character of each word is entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters are lowercase All Uppercase Displays when all characters will be entered as uppercase characters By default the first letter of an entry is capitalized and the following letters are lower case After a word is entered and you lift your finger the cursor automatically adds a space after the word Note If multiple word choices exist for your Swype entry an on screen popup appears to provide additional word choices Entering Text 81 Entering Numbers and Symbols in S
58. more information refer to The Gallery on page 137 Game Base The T Mobile Game Base provides access to a game rental and purchase services for compatible T Mobile Android devices 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt K Game Base 2 Tap an available category and follow the on screen instructions Google Mail Google Mail Gmail is a web based email service Gmail is configured when you first set up your phone Depending on your synchronization settings Gmail can automatically synchronize with your Gmail account on the web gt From the Home screen tap d Applications gt ag Gmail For more information refer to Using Google Mail on page 123 Google Search Google Search is a web based search engine that uses text based queries to search for content on web pages p From the Home screen tap id Applications gt E Google Search and enter the search text ior Tap 4 on the Google Search bar and say the search information For more information refer to Search Key on page 31 For more information refer to Using Google Search on page 31 Kies air Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on the same Wi Fi network You can view and share call logs videos photos music bookmarks ringtones and even send SMS messages from your PC p From the Home screen tap Applications gt Kies air For more informat
59. of recent calls 1 From the Home screen tap Gi 2 Press and then tap Speed dial setting The Speed Dialing Speed dial settings screen Once you have stored phone numbers from your Contacts List displays a virtual keypad you can set up to 8 speed dial entries and then dial them easily whenever you want simply by touching the associated numeric key 3 Tap the name number and tap A with the numbers 1 through 9 3 Tap an unassigned number The Contacts screen displays 4 Tap a contact and select a number to assign to the speed dial location The selected contact number image is displayed in the speed dial number box 64 Changing a Speed Dial Entry Order 1 From the Home screen tap i 2 Press and then tap Speed dial setting Important The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail and another number cannot be assigned to this slot 3 Press and then tap Change order 4 Ina single motion touch and drag an entry over another location on the virtual keypad 5 Tap Save to store the new assignment 6 Press to return to the previous screen Removing a Speed Dial Entry 1 2 3 4 From the Home screen tap i s Press and then tap Speed dial setting Touch and hold a existing on screen speed dial location and select Remove from the context menu Press E and then tap Remove Tap an entry and select Remove Press to return to the previous screen Making a Call Using Speed Dial You can ass
60. open at one time To add a new window follow these steps 1 Note This icon will display a number that corresponds to the current number 190 From your browser press and then tap New window Press and then tap Windows gt New window A new browser window displays Press and then tap Windows to see a list of all open windows of active browser windows Scroll across the screen to view the currently active windows and tap an entry to launch the selected Internet window Tap e next to the listing to delete the window Using Bookmarks While navigating a website you can bookmark a site to quickly and easily access it at a future time The URLs website addresses of the bookmarked sites display in the Bookmarks page From the Bookmarks page you can also view your Most visited websites and view your History 1 From the webpage tap The Bookmarks page displays Additional pages include Most visited and History Press to display the following options Bookmark last viewed page Creates a new bookmark for the last webpage that you viewed e List Thumbnail view Select Thumbnail view default to view a thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed or select List view to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed e Create folder Creates a new folder in which to store new bookmarks e Change order Rearranges the current bookmarks Move to folder Selected bookmarks are moved to a selected f
61. or delete digits by pressing K x J to erase the numbers 5 Tap once the number has been changed Call Functions and Contacts List 75 Erasing the Logs List You can delete either an individual call log entry or all current entries from the Logs list To clear a single entry from the list 1 From the Home screen tap isi gt A 2 Touch and hold an entry and select Delete To clear all entries from the list r gt 1 From the Home screen tap R gt Ea 2 Press and then tap Delete 3 Tap Select all gt Delete gt OK Viewing Call Durations You can view call duration information based on one of four categories 1 From the Home screen tap isi gt 2l 2 Press and then tap Call duration 3 Review the Call duration information It is broken down into four categories Last call Dialed calls Received calls and All calls 76 Viewing Missed Calls from Lock Screen When you are unable to answer a call for any reason and your screen is locked the number of missed calls are displayed on the Lock screen immediately after a call is missed To view a missed call immediately 1 2 Press EVO to reactive the screen Touch and drag the button with the number of missed calls on it outside of the on screen large circle The Logs tab is then displayed Section 5 Entering Text This section describes how to select the desired text input method when entering characters into your phone This sec
62. or redistribute the Service whether all or any portion of it and such displaying copying storing modification sale publishing and redistribution shall be prohibited unless you have obtained all necessary rights and permissions from Samsung and the owners and right holders of such the Service or relevant part You must not use the Service for any purposes other than those permitted under the Terms Without limiting this restriction you must not use the service for any illegal purposes to make unsolicited offers or advertisements to impersonate or falsely claim affiliation with any person or entity to misrepresent harass defraud or defame others to post obscene or unreasonably offensive material to negatively present the Service nor for any commercial purposes Except as expressly permitted by the Terms and except to the extent that applicable laws prevent Samsung from restraining you from doing so you are not allowed to disassemble reverse engineer tamper with the Service transmit malicious code or collect information of other users through the Service You may not take any action to interrupt the functionality of or tamper with the Service or any content or service contained in or provided through the Service or any servers used in providing the Service or to unreasonably affect others enjoyment of the Service in any way Actions Required by Law Samsung may need to comply with lawful interception and or data retent
63. page 210 Slacker Slacker offers free internet radio for mobile phones 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt Slacker Important You must register and create a free account prior to using this service 2 Read the on screen notice and tap OK 3 Begin selecting the music you want to listen to Social Hub Allows you to easily and intuitively satisfy all of your communication needs from within a single user interface E mails instant messaging social network contents and calendar contents from all major service providers are available 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Social Hub The Welcome to Social Hub page describes all of the available features Tap Setup now to setup your Social Hub account Tap on an account type that you would like to setup Choose from either email accounts SNS accounts or other IM accounts If you choose an SNS account read the SNS disclaimer tap the accept all the terms above checkbox then tap Agree to continue Tap Next Follow the on screen instructions for adding an account From the Social Hub main screen tap the Feeds or Messages tabs to see information pertaining to your account 8 To add another account press gt Account gt Add account T Mobile Mall This downloadable application provides access to several phone features and tunes 1 From the Home screen tap cd Applications gt T Mobile Mal Read the o
64. personal information may also include technical information such as your IP address and other anonymous data involving your use of the Service Non personal information may also include information that you provide us through your use of the Service such as the terms you enter into the search functions of Social Hub mail inbox and instant messenger We reserve the right to use or disclose non personal information in any way we see fit USE OF INFORMATION WE COLLECT Our Services We use your personal information to provide you with any services that you may request or require to communicate with you and to allow you to participate in online surveys We use aggregated non personal information about our users to understand the demographics of users of the Service such as the percentage of male and female users the geographic distribution of our users the age ranges of our users a combination of these and or other demographics We may also use the personal or non personal information we collect to analyze how Service is being used and to improve the content of the Service and for marketing and promotional efforts E mail Communications If you send us an e mail with questions or comments we may use your personal information to respond to your questions or comments and we may save your questions or comments for future reference Aside from our reply to such an e mail it is not our standard practice to send you e mail unless you
65. positions accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum reported value This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network In general the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna the lower the power output of the phone Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC Tests for each model phone are performed in positions and locations e g at the ear and worn on the body as required by the FCC For body worn operation this phone has been tested and meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a minimum of 1 0 cm from the body Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this mobile phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines The maximum SAR values for this model phone as reported to the FCC are e Head 0 74 W kg Body worn 1 02 W kg SAR information on this and other model phones can be accesse
66. radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network PLAN If your wireless provider has chosen to participate in 254 CMAS PLAN alerts are available while in the provider s coverage area If you travel outside your provider s coverage area wireless emergency alerts may not be available For more information please contact your wireless provider Smart Practices While Driving On the Road Off the Phone The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of his or her vehicle Responsible drivers u
67. recordings with your Google Account e Google Account dashboard allows you to manage your collected data via your Google account 5 Press to return to the previous screen Configuring Text to speech This feature allows the phone to provide a verbal readout of on screen data such as messages and incoming caller information This action is called TTS Text To Speech 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Voice input and output gt Text to speech settings 2 Configure the available options to alter the settings associated with this feature e Listen to an example plays a short example of what the text to speech feature sounds like on your device when activated Driving mode incoming calls and new notifications are automatically ready out loud e Driving mode settings selects those applications that will use TTS while driving mode is activated Choose from Incoming call Message New emails New voicemail Alarm Schedule or Unlock screen e Always use my settings accepts an override of application settings with personal configurations for this text to speech settings screen If enabled your device defaults to using the text to speech feature e Default engine sets the speech synthesis engine that will be used for the spoken text Choices include Pico TTS e Install voice data confirms the installation of necessary data required for voice synthesis Speech rate adjusts the rate
68. referred to as the Contacts list 1 Press fay and then tap N 2 Enter the phone number and then tap p gt Ifyou make a mistake while dialing tap x j to clear the last digit Touch and hold to clear the entire sequence 56 Note When you activate the Auto redial option in the Additional settings menu the phone automatically redials up to 10 times when the person does not answer the call or is already on the phone provided your call is not sent to voice mail Quick Dialing a Number from the Contacts List 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Contacts 2 Locate a contact from the list 3 In a single motion touch and slide your finger over the number by going to the right This action places a call to the recipient Ending a Call p gt Briefly tap key to end the call Note To redial a recent number tap wi at the end of the call or locate the number from the Logs list tap the entry and tap If you exit the current call screen and return to the Home screen You are visually notified that you are still on an active call by the green phone icon within the Status bar In Call Notification Ending a Call from the Status Bar 1 Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel 1 2 Tap End to end the currently active call 2 Software update Making Emergency Calls If you do not have a SIM card installed the first ti
69. sites that require cookies to save and read cookies from your device e Clear all cookie data Deletes all current browser cookie files e Remember form data Allows the device to store data from any previously filled out forms Remove the checkmark to disable this function e Clear form data Deletes any stored data from previously filled out forms Tap OK to complete the process e Enable location Allows websites to request access to your location e Clear location access Clears location access for all websites Tap OK to complete the process e Remember passwords Stores usernames and passwords for visited sites Remove the checkmark to disable this function e Clear passwords Deletes any previously stored usernames or passwords Tap OK to complete the process Show security warnings Notifies you if there is a security issue with the current website Remove the checkmark to disable this function e Select search engine Allows you to choose a default search engine for your phone Choose from Google Yahoo or Bing e Website settings View advanced settings for individual websites e Reset to default Clears all browser data and resets all settings to default Connections 193 Bluetooth About Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short range communications technology that allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth devices such as headsets and hands free car kits and Bluetooth enabled handhelds computers
70. software directly to your phone The phone automatically updates with the latest available software when you access this option Note If appears in the Status Bar area tap it to be taken to the Software updated screen 1 Press fay gt and then tap Oo Settings gt Software update 2 Read the Software update information screen 3 Select an available option Note You configure the device s software update parameters e OK Tap this option to connecto the remote server detect if there is an available update the begin the download over your exisiting data connection Software updates can include bug fixes enhancements to services to the device or currently installed sfotware e Wi Fi settings Enable this option to only download available updates via an active Wi Fi connection If disabled the device will begin available downloads via its T Mobile connection 246 e Cancel Tap this option to cancel the operation Changing Your Settings 247 Section 13 Health and Safety Information This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using your phone The terms mobile device or cell phone are used in this section to refer to your phone Read this information before using your mobile device Exposure to Radio Frequency RF Signals The U S Food and Drug Administration FDA has published information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency RF exposure from wireless phones
71. status There is an error in the use or 911 registration of the Wi Fi bar Calling feature Displays on the Your action is required to Al screen status activate the Wi Fi Calling bar feature If prompted to validate your address for 911 serive follow the on screen prompts Displays on the A screen status bar There is device specific support information available from within your My Device application 3 Use the phone Dialer call log or contacts list to make a call 4 Go to the dialer and make a call Make sure Wi Fi Calling in use appears during the call In Call Options Your phone provides a number of features that are available for use during a call Place a call Dials the on hold number Call duration Adds a Ends the new call call Activates or Activates or Deactivates Deactivates speakerphone Mutes or Unmutes Bluetooth the call Headset Adjusting the Call Volume During a call use the Volume keys on the left side of the phone to adjust the earpiece volume p Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level and the Down volume key to decrease the level sois During a call press the Up Volume key on the side of the device From the Home screen you can also adjust the ring volume using these keys Placing a Call on Hold You can place the current call on hold whenever you want If your network supports this service you can also make another call while a
72. synchronizes the data from the selected account type with your Contacts list ay gt and then tap OP gt Accounts and sync gt Add account 1 Press 2 Determine which type of account information you want to synchronize with your Contact list Selections are Facebook Twitter LinkedIn Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Google T Mobile Video Chat or MobileLife Contacts 3 Tap an account type to add 4 Follow the prompts The selected account type synchronizes with your Contacts list 5 After synchronizing accounts you may want to link contact information For more information refer to Joining Contact Information on page 96 To add Facebook content to your Contacts list You can now add your Facebook contact information such as pictures email and phone numbers directly to your Contacts list All of their current contact information is then migrated over to your phone If a Contacts entry already exists with a slightly different name separate entries are created and can later be linked joined together into a single entry Important This process not only synchronizes your contact information but also your status events and more 1 Press cay gt and then tap OP gt Accounts and sync gt Add account gt Facebook 2 Select your country and accept the terms of the Social Hub then tap Agree 3 Read the on screen descriptions and tap Next 4 Log into your Facebook account e Enter your accou
73. the Favorites tab e Remove from favorites allows you to remove the current Contacts entry from the Favorites tab Add to group allows you to add the current Contacts entry to an existing group Add to reject list Remove from reject list allows you to add or remove the current Contacts entry to a list of automatically rejected incoming phone numbers e Send namecard via allows you to send the current Contact entry s information to an external recipient via either Bluetooth Email Exchange or Internet Gmail or Messaging e Print namecard allows you to print selected information on a compatible Samsung printer Contact Entry Options 1 From the Home screen tap A Tap an entry to reveal the Contact entry s Overview Screen This screen contains Name contact numbers email and linked contact information Press to reveal the context menu specific to this entry Contact Overview Screen Tap an available option Contacts 95 Joining Contact Information Most people now maintain multiple email accounts social networking logins and other similar account information For example a Facebook account login name might differ from a corporate email account login because they are maintained separately and for different groups of people This device can synchronize with multiple accounts such as Facebook LinkedIn Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Google or T Mobile When you synchronize your phone with
74. those accounts each account creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list If one of your contacts Amy Smith has a regular email account that you maintain in Gmail but also has a Facebook account under her maiden and married name as well as a Video chat account when you merge those accounts into your Contacts list you can join all of her entries and view the information in one record Joining contact information makes sending messages easy You can select any account email address or information all from one screen versus searching multiple individual screens to locate the desired account information 96 Next time you synchronize your phone with your accounts any updates contacts make to email account names email addresses etc automatically update in your contacts list 1 From the Home screen tap BB 2 Tap a contact name the name you want to link to another entry to reveal the Contact entry s Overview Screen Note Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account information 3 Press and then tap Join contact 4 Tap the second contact entry the entry in which to link The second contact is now linked with the first and the account information is merged into one screen Note The information is still maintained in both entries but displays in one record for easier viewing when you link the contacts Important It is the second contact image that is displayed for both but the
75. to Connecting to the SD card on page 54 From the Registration screen Transfer click Transfer Video now and select the location of the microSD card or USB the device as the target destination for the registration video created in step 6 and click Start or Locate the created file copy and paste it into the new drive letter corresponding to your device s storage location From the Home screen tap i Applications gt Files Locate your registration DivX video file and tap the file to play it Once you play the registration file on your device your registration is complete Return to the DivX VOD Manager screen from within your computer s DivX Player and confirm both your computer and your new device appears in the list of registered DivX devices Multimedia 139 Important There is no special registration or configuration necessary to playback DRM free DivX movies Registration of your device is only required for playback of protected DivX material Media Hub Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and TV content With hundreds of titles available entertaining your family on the go was never easier You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch from any location Featuring the stunning viewing quality Samsung is known for Samsung Media Hub is your gateway to mobile video like you ve never experienced it before You must have the Samsung Account application installed an
76. to website allows you to navigate to any component of your device 32 e note to self message allows you to search for a note save to your Memo Pad e directions to location using your current location allows you to receive directions to a selected destination Home Screen The Home screen is the starting point for using the applications on your phone There are initially seven available panels each populated with default shortcuts or applications You can customize each of these panels Status Bar Google search bar Widget Notification area Home Screen Status area Shortcuts Primary Shortcuts e Notification area displays those icons associated with end user notifications such as email messages calls missed call in progress new voicemail upcoming event USB connection emails and Text MMS messages These notifications appear at the top left of the screen within the Status bar area and display important user information This information can be accessed by either swiping down from the Status bar page 28 or by accessing the Notifications panel gt Notifications Q e Status area displays those icons associated with the status of the device such as communication coverage Bluetooth 4G 3G Wi Fi communication battery levels GPS etc e Home Screen is a customizable screen that provides information about notifications and device status and allows access to application Widgets Exte
77. view Memory storage information for the phone or memory card You can also view the battery level percentage and other information Navigation Google Maps Navigation Beta is an internet connected turn by turn GPS navigation system with voice guidance Caution Traffic data is not real time and directions may be wrong dangerous prohibited or involve ferries Important To receive better GPS signals avoid using your device in the following conditions inside a building or between buildings in a tunnel or underground passage in poor weather around high voltage or electromagnetic fields in a vehicle with tinted windows p From the Home screen tap Applications gt A Navigation Applications and Development 173 Enabling GPS Location 3 Choose from the following on screen options 1 Press cay gt and then tap Ke Settings gt e Driving Walking configures the method of travel Selection of Location and security Walking would negate the need to track traffic jams and obstructions 2 Tap Use wireless networks A green check mark indicates Driving mode enables the Settings feature allows you to configure your Route options such as Avoid highways or Avoid tolls Maps enables the on screen real time map functionality 3 Tap Use GPS satellites A green check mark indicates the e Speak Destination allows you to use the voice recognition feature i to search for matching locations in your area GPS locat
78. 1 Voicemail service allows you to view your voicemail carrier For more information refer to Voicemail on page 222 Voicemail allows you to both view and assign your voicemail contact number For more information refer to Voicemail on page 222 Configuring Call Forwarding fay gt and then tap Settings gt Call gt Call forwarding 1 Press 2 Tap an available option e Always forward incoming calls are re routed to a secondary number that you specify e Forward when busy forwards all your calls to voicemail when your phone is busy e Forward when unanswered automatically forwards to your voicemail number when the phone is not answered and otherwise allows you to enter a voicemail number e Forward when unreachable automatically forwards to your voicemail number when the phone is not in service or is turned off 220 TTY Mode ATTY also known as a TDD or Text Telephone is a telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf hard of hearing or who have speech or language disabilities to communicate by telephone Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it is compatible with digital cell phones Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that plugs into your phone s headset jack If this cable was not provided with your TTY device contact your TTY device manufacturer to purcha
79. 3 months 6 months or All calendar e Size to retrieve emails configures the incoming email size allowed to pass through to your phone automatically without user interaction Emails with attachments larger than configured will have to be retrieved manually e Security options allows you to enable several security options such as Encryption Encryption algorithm Sign Sign algorithms Email certificates and Security policy list These security policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers Security policy list lists the current email s security policy These policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers e Incase of Sync Conflict allows you to assign the master source on emails If there is a conflict with the current email sync you can assign the server as the main source for all emails Update to phone or assign the phone to be the main source and update the server accordingly Update to server e Auto resend times enables the phone to resend an outgoing email a specified number of times if delivery fails e Email notifications enables the phone to display a status bar icon when new email messages have been received e Select ringtone assigns an audible ringtone when a new or upcoming event is pending e Vibration assigns a vibration when a new or upcoming event is pending Exchange server settings provides access to the Domain user name Password and Exchange server settings e S
80. AP feature Note You can not mount your phone s microSD card to your computer while using the USB tethering feature If additional software or USB drivers are required navigate to http Awww samsung com us support downloads 1 Press ay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt USB tethering and Mobile HotSpot 2 Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your phone 3 When prompted for a USB mode press to exit the menu 4 Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu This places a green check mark next to the entry and activates the feature A Tethering or Hotspot active notification briefly appears on the screen Look for the Tethering active icon in the Status bar area of the screen To disconnect tethering 1 Press Ol gt and then tap Settings gt Wireless and network gt USB tethering and Mobile HotSpot 2 Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu to remove the check mark and deactivate the feature 3 Remove the USB cable from the phone Mobile HotSpot This feature allows you to turn your phone into a Wi Fi hotspot The feature works best when used in conjunction with HSPA 4G data services although 3G service can also be used Important The Mobile AP service can not be active at the same time as Wi Fi Please close your Wi Fi connection prior to launching the Mobile AP service Note You must have a tethering plan on your account to use the Wi Fi hotspot Y
81. ARY OR OTHERWISE WHICH BUT FOR SUCH EXCLUSION WOULD OR MIGHT SUBSIST IN FAVOUR OF YOU EXCEPT AS SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE 6 3 SUBJECT TO CLAUSE 6 1 LICENSOR WILL BE UNDER NO LIABILITY TO YOU WHATSOEVER WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE BREACH OF STATUTORY DUTY 290 RESTITUTION OR OTHERWISE FOR ANY INJURY DEATH DAMAGE OR DIRECT INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS ALL THREE OF WHICH TERMS INCLUDE WITHOUT LIMITATION PURE ECONOMIC LOSS LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF DATA LOSS OF SAVINGS DEPLETION OF GOODWILL AND LIKE LOSS HOWSOEVER CAUSED ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH 6 3 1 THE SOFTWARE OR THE MANUFACTURE OR SALE OR SUPPLY OR FAILURE OR DELAY IN SUPPLY OF THE SOFTWARE BY LICENSOR OR ON THE PART OF LICENSOR S EMPLOYEES AGENTS OR SUB CONTRACTORS 6 3 2 ANY BREACH BY LICENSOR OF ANY OF THE EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TERMS OF THIS LICENSE 6 3 3 ANY USE MADE OF THE SOFTWARE OR 6 3 4 ANY STATEMENT MADE OR NOT MADE OR ADVICE GIVEN OR NOT GIVEN BY OR ON BEHALF OF LICENSOR 6 4 Disclaimer of Certain Damages IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY PARTY RELATED TO YOU FOR ANY INDIRECT INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OR LOST PROFITS EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THIS LIMITATION WILL APPLY REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER FRAU
82. Android 2 3 6 Gingerbread Platform e Compatible with Adobe Flash technology e Wi Fi Capability USB Tethering capable and Mobile HotSpot Capability e Bluetooth enabled e Full Integration of Google Mobile Services Gmail YouTube Google Maps Google Voice Search Multiple Messaging Options Text Picture Video Messaging and Instant Messaging with Google Talk Corporate and Personal Email 20 e 5 Megapixel Camera and Camcorder with flash autofocus and 4X digital zoom e 1 3 Megapixel Front Facing camera and preloaded Qik T Mobile Video Chat application MP3 Player with multitasking features Over 250 000 Apps available to download from the Android Market e Pre loaded e reader applications such as Google Books and Zinio e Social Hub to integrate all of your favorite social networking sites e Polaris Office for document viewing and editing e Assisted GPS TeleNav GPS Navigation and Google Navigation e Built in memory on board Expandable memory slot supports up to 32GB e Lookout Security Security Backup Missing Device capabilities e T Mobile TV e Slacker Radio e Samsung Media Hub e SWYPE text input technology Netflix for viewing TV Shows and Movies e Wi Fi Calling via the use of an ISIM card e Visual Voicemail e Compatibility with a new ISIM card e Access to thousands of Movies and TV Shows with the Samsung Media Hub e Video Player Codec MPEG4 H 264 H 263 H 263
83. D MISREPRESENTATION BREACH OF CONTRACT NEGILIGENCE PERSONAL INJURY PRODUCTS LIABILITY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INFRINGEMENT OR ANY OTHER THEORY REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THIS MEANS THAT YOU WILL NOT SEEK AND HEREBY WAIVE ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL TREBLE OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES FROM SAMSUNG THIS LIMITATION AND WAIVER ALSO APPLIES TO ANY CLAIMS YOU MAY BRING AGAINST ANY OTHER PARTY TO THE EXTENT THAT SAMSUNG WOULD BE REQUIRED TO INDEMNIFY THAT PARTY FOR SUCH CLAIM 6 5 You acknowledge that the above provisions of this clause 6 are reasonable for the Software and you will accept such risk and or insure accordingly 6 6 Any rights that you have as a consumer are not affected by this clause 6 7 TERM AND TERMINATION 7 1 This License shall commence upon the earlier of your acceptance of this License or your activation of the Software and shall continue until terminated in accordance with clause 7 2 or otherwise in accordance with this License 7 2 This License will terminate automatically if you fail to comply with any term or condition of this License or if you cease to use the Software for any reason 7 3 Upon termination of this License for any reason whatsoever Licensor retains the right to permanently disable your access to the Software 7 4 The termination of this License howsoever arising is without prejudice to the rights duties and liabilities of ei
84. DivX Certified to play Divx video up to HD 720p including premium content ABOUT DIVX VIDEO DivX is a digital video format created by DivX LLC a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video Visit www divx com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos ABOUT DIVX VIDEO ON DEMAND This DivX Certified device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video on Demand VOD movies To obtain your registration code locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu tap Applications gt Settings gt About phone gt Legal information gt License settings gt DivX VOD gt Register in your device setup menu Go to_vod divx com for more information on how to complete your registration Table of Contents Section 1 Getting Started 6 Home Screen 2 22 cece eee eee eee 32 Understanding this User Manual 6 Screen Navigation essa rar n ies Piles awn 35 Battery COVER f isreac nenoriai sheared 7 Menu NaVigation esatie inna ann ie tw Seat 37 SIM Card Overview 0 c cece cece eee eee ees 8 ADDIICAtIONS aininn EEEE anual 38 installing the microSD Memory Card 0 9 Customizing the Screens ccceeeeeeeee 47 Battery 0 0 6 0 oni seins Peauaawutwies KERROS 10 Section 3 Memory Card scscssssssssssssesesseeesesesess 53 Extending Your Battery Life c0e sees 13 sing th
85. E SUPPLYING OF THE SERVICES AGAIN OR B THE PAYMENT OF THE COST OF HAVING THE SERVICES SUPPLIED AGAIN AND IN THE CASE OF GOODS A THE REPLACEMENT OF THE GOODS OR THE SUPPLY OF EQUIVALENT GOODS B THE REPAIR OF THE GOODS C THE PAYMENT OF THE COST OF REPLACING THE GOODS OR OF ACQUIRING EQUIVALENT GOODS OR D THE PAYMENT OF THE COST OF HAVING THE GOODS REPAIRED Indemnification You agree to defend indemnify and hold harmless Samsung from and against any and all third party claims and all liabilities assessments losses costs or damages resulting from or arising out of i your breach of the Terms ii your infringement or violation of any intellectual property other rights or privacy of a third party iii misuse of the Service by a third party where such misuse was made possible due to your failure to take reasonable measures to protect your username and password against misuse Choice of Law Except where prohibited by applicable law or provided otherwise herein the Terms shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York without regard to its conflict of law provisions You and Samsung agree to submit to the non exclusive jurisdiction of the competent courts in the State of New York to resolve any legal matters arising from the Terms Notwithstanding this you agree that Samsung shall still be allowed to apply for injunctive remedies or equivalent type of urgent legal relief in any jurisdiction Miscellaneous The
86. ERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT LOSS OF USE TIME DATA REPUTATION Warranty Information 269 OPPORTUNITY GOODWILL PROFITS OR SAVINGS INCONVENIENCE INCIDENTAL SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE AS TO THE QUALITY CAPABILITIES OPERATIONS PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT OR THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT WHETHER SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY CAPABILITIES OPERATIONS PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be construed to create an express warranty of any kind with respect to the Products No agent employee dealer representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend this Limited Warranty or 270 to make binding representation
87. ICE INSTRUCTIONS If your mobile device has a touch screen display please note that a touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your finger or a non metallic stylus Using excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the AMERICA USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF touch screen may damage the tempered glass surface THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER and void the warranty For more information please refer OUTLET to the Standard Limited Warranty THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR GPS amp AGPS MOUNT POSITION Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning Display Touch Screen System GPS signal for location based applications A GPS uses satellites controlled by the U S Government that are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan FRP DANGER TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH Please note the following information when using your mobile device 258 Changes may affect the performance of location based technology on your mobile device Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted Global Positioning System AGPS which obtains information from the cellular network to improve GPS performance AGPS uses your wireless service provider s netwo
88. IN2 incorrectly three times will cause the device to lock Contact customer service for assistance Voicemail Allows you to view and assign your voicemail contact number To view your current carrier 1 Press AO gt and then tap sO Settings gt Call gt Voicemail service 2 Tap My carrier To view or change your current voicemail access number 1 Press fa gt and then tap Settings gt Call gt Voicemail Tap Voicemail number to now view your number within the Voicemail number field or Tap within the number field tap to delete the current number and enter a new number Tap OK to store the new number Sound Settings From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone as well as configure the display settings p gt Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Sound The following options display Silent mode Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone from making noise in a theater for example In Silent Mode the speaker is muted and the phone only vibrates to notify you of incoming calls or other functions that normally have a defined tone or sound as an alert 1 Press cay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Sound 2 Tap Silent mode or From the Home screen press and hold 70 until Phone options displays 3 Tap Silent mode to activate or deactivate this mode the current mode displays Setup Phone Vibration 1 Press fay gt and then
89. IRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND ON AN AS AVAILABLE BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TO THE FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY ACCURACY LACK OF VIRUSES QUIET ENJOYMENT NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE THRID PARTY APPLICATION THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET PURCHASER S REQUIREMENTS THAT THE OPERATION OF THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE CORRECTED PURCHASER ASSUMES THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN OBTAINED BY PURCHASER FROM SAMSUNG SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY 11 Limitation of Liability SAMS
90. Installing the microSD Memory Card on page 9 Also see Mounting the SD Card on page 54 1 Press ay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Applications 2 Tap the Unknown sources check box 3 Tap OK to allow install of non Market applications Tap again to remove the checkmark and disable the installation of non market applications Warning Not all web applications are safe to download In order to protect your phone and data use Android Market to install web applications For more information refer to Downloading a New Google Application on page 164 Connections 197 PC Connections You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC data cable using various USB connection modes Mass storage is the default connection method Mass storage allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of the phone to store and upload files This option allows your computer to detect the phone as a removable storage drive Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on the same Wi Fi network Connecting as a Mass Storage Device You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and access the file directory If you insert a memory card in the device you can also access the files directory from the memory card by using the device as a memory card reader Note The file directory of the memory card displays as a removable disk separate from the internal memor
91. License BSD License and other open source licenses To obtain the source code covered under the open source licenses please visit http opensource samsung com Disclaimer of Warranties Exclusion of Liability EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT THE PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT AS IS AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE THE DESIGN CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW RULE SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT IN ADDITION SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF T769_UM_English_UVLB4_PS_031912_F7 THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY INCLUDING INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE USING C
92. MS AND OTHER PUBLIC AREAS 287 Smart Practices While Driving 004 254 CONTESTS AND SWEEPSTAKES 0 0005 287 Battery Use and Safety 0 00 0 cece eae 255 ACCURACY OF THE INFORMATION WE COLLECT 288 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling 256 CHANGES TO PRIVACY POLICY 05 288 UL Certified Travel Charger 258 Social Hub End User License Agreement 288 Display Touch Screen 0005 258 Index wa 293 GPS BeAGRS anaia diate tne te wdvuek eles ds 258 Emergency Cals c cie5c 2 06d rereke een aka naaa 259 Care and Maintenance 260 Responsible Listening 261 Operating Environment 263 FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC Regulations for Wireless DEVICES a ws sranane anioe eE 264 Restricting Children s Access to Your Mobile Device 266 FCC Notice and Cautions cee eee eee Other Important Safety Information 0 Section 14 Warranty Information scsees Standard Limited Warranty End User License Agreement for Software SOCIAIAUD simi staenio cries ase LIMITATION OF LIABILITY ccc ccwcaiakscewecencnenens Social Hub Privacy Policy ccc cee e eee Section 1 Getting Started This section explains how to get started with your phone by installing and charging the battery installing the SIM card and optional memory card and setting up your voice mail Before using
93. Messaging screen touch and hold the message to display the following options e View contact displays the Contact s Overview page e Add to contact begins the process of adding the new number to your Contacts list e Delete thread deletes the currently selected message thread To access additional Bubble options gt Touch and hold the message bubble to display the following options e Delete message deletes the currently selected message bubble from the thread e Add to Contacts adds the current caller to your Contacts list e Copy message text copies the currently selected message bubble from the thread e Lock Unlock message locks or unlocks the currently selected message bubble from being accidentally deleted e Forward allows you to forward the currently selected message bubble to an external recipient e Copy to SIM copies the currently selected message bubble as a single text message within the SIM card e View message details displays details for the currently selected message bubble Deleting Messages Deleting a message thread 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap Touch and hold a message from the Messages list then select Delete thread At the prompt tap OK to delete or Cancel to exit Deleting a single message 1 2 3 4 From the Home screen tap Open a message to reveal the message string Touch and hold a message bubble then select Delete message At t
94. ONS Certain third party applications may be included with or downloaded to this mobile device SAMSUNG makes no representations whatsoever about any of these applications Since SAMSUNG has no control over such applications Purchaser acknowledges and agrees that SAMSUNG is not responsible for the availability of such applications and is not responsible or liable for any content advertising products services or other materials on or available from such applications Purchaser expressly acknowledges and agrees that use of third party applications is at Purchaser s sole risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality performance accuracy and effort is with Purchaser It is up to Purchaser to take precautions to ensure that whatever Purchaser selects to use is free of such items as viruses worms Trojan horses and other items of a destructive nature References on 274 this mobile device to any names marks products or services of any third parties are provided solely as a convenience to Purchaser and do not constitute or imply an endorsement sponsorship or recommendation of or affiliation with the third party or its products and services Purchaser agrees that SAMSUNG shall not be responsible or liable directly or indirectly for any damage or loss caused or alleged to caused by or in connection with use of or reliance on any such third party content products or services available on or through any such application Purch
95. Samsung GALAXY BLAZE 46 exclusively from E Mobile PORTABLE QUAD BAND MOBILE PHONE User Manual Please read this manual before operating your phone and keep it for future reference ace Intellectual Property All Intellectual Property as defined below owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers relating to the SAMSUNG Phone including but not limited to accessories parts or software relating there to the Phone System is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws state laws and international treaty provisions Intellectual Property includes but is not limited to inventions patentable or unpatentable patents trade secrets copyrights software computer programs and related documentation and other works of authorship You may not infringe or otherwise violate the rights secured by the Intellectual Property Moreover you agree that you will not and will not attempt to modify prepare derivative works of reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software No title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain with SAMSUNG and its suppliers Open Source Software Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License GPL GNU Lesser General Public License LGPL OpenSSL
96. Samsung retains all right title and interest in the Service and in all Samsung s products software and other properties provided to you or used by you through the Service Personal Data The Social Hub Privacy Policy and the following additional provisions govern the use of your personal information When you access the Service Samsung may ask for or otherwise collect certain personal information such as your email address along with your user name and password and in certain cases your mobile phone number so that we can communicate with you for example to send notifications of incoming messages When you use the Service certain technical information such as the type and serial number of your mobile device Internet protocol address your mobile network and country codes timezone technical details of your client as well as your transactions with Samsung for example your acceptance of the Terms will be automatically collected by Samsung The purposes for which Samsung may use such data are explained in the Social Hub Privacy Policy Samsung may also participate with your selected service providers in maintaining your contact lists The third party services and content you access through the Service and the telecommunications carriers and the network through which you access the Service are provided and hosted by your selected third party content and service providers who typically has a privacy policy of its own We recommend you f
97. Sorenson WMV7 8 VC 1 DivX 3 11 and DivX4 5 6 Format 3GP MP4 ASF WMV FLV MKV and AVI e DivX Certified to play Divx video up to HD 720p including premium content e Kies Air to wirelessly sync your PC with your phone via a Wi Fi connection e AllShare to share your media content across DLNA certified devices F Mobile Front View The following illustrations show the main elements of your phone The following list correlates to the illustrations 1 Front Facing Camera allows you to take pictures while facing the screen and allows you to video conference SAMSUNG 6 Note Video recorded in Portrait mode is reversed during playback Understanding Your Device 21 Menu key displays a list of options available for the current screen From the Home screen it displays Add Wallpaper Search Notifications Edit and Settings options Home key displays the Home screen when pressed USB Power Accessory connector allows you to connect a power cable or optional accessories such as a USB data cable Microphone is used during phone calls and allows other callers to hear you clearly when you are speaking to them It is also used to make voice note recordings Quick search is used to search the device for applications contact information or searches the internet for information Back key redisplays the previous screen or clears entries Display shows all the information needed to operate your phone such as th
98. Substitution field for example you fve Tap Done to save the substitution rule 4 Press to return to the previous screen Entering Text 87 Section 6 Contacts This section explains how to use and manage your Contacts List 4 From the Manage accounts area tap o next to the You can save phone numbers to your phone s memory account you want to synchronize Accounts or From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications to Tap Add account to create a new account synchronize send and receive data at any given time or if you want the applications to synchronize automatically After 5 Tap an account type to add determining how you want the accounts to synchronize indicate 6 Follow the on screen instructions The selected account which account to synchronize with your Contacts list 1 Sign in to your Google account 2 Press fay gt and then tap O Settings gt Accounts and sync or From the Home screen tap co Applications gt Settings gt Accounts and sync type synchronizes with your Contacts list 3 From the General sync settings section tap one of the following options e Background data allows your phone to use data in the background e Auto sync automatically synchronizes your data with the phone 88 Contacts List Creating a Contact The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts List is your phone s built in memory T MobileLife Contacts
99. TENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SERVICE YOU EXPRESSLY AGREE AND ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE USE OF THE SERVICE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT YOU MAY BE EXPOSED TO CONTENT FROM VARIOUS SOURCES SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY THIRD PARTY CONTENT OR SERVICE THAT MAY BE ACCESSED THROUGH THE SERVICE NOR SHALL SAMSUNG BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR MALICIOUS CODE CONTAINED ON OR DISTRIBUTED THROUGH BY THIRD PARTIES YOU ASSUME FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES LOSSES COSTS OR HARM ARISING FROM YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SERVICE TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW EXCEPT FOR LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY CAUSED BY GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR INTENTIONAL MISCONDUCT 282 SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITIES WITH RESPECT TO YOUR USE OF THE SERVICE INCLUDING DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IF THERE IS A CLAIM THAT WE HAVE BREACHED ANY OF THE PROVISIONS IN THE TERMS THIS DOES NOT AFFECT OR INVALIDATE THE OTHER PROVISIONS CERTAIN STATUTORY PROVISIONS UNDER APPLICABLE LAW MAY IMPLY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OR IMPOSE OBLIGATIONS UPON SAMSUNG WHICH CANNOT BE EXCLUDED RESTRICTED OR MODIFIED OR CANNOT BE EXCLUDED RESTRICTED OR MODIFIED EXCEPT TO A LIMITED EXTENT THE TERMS MUST BE READ SUBJECT TO THESE STATUTORY PROVISIONS IF THESE STATUTORY PROVISIONS APPLY TO THE EXTENT TO WHICH SAMSUNG IS ABLE TO DO SO SAMSUNG LIMITS ITS LIABILITY UNDER THOSE PROVISIONS TO AT ITS OPTION IN THE CASE OF SERVICES A TH
100. The FDA publication includes the following information Do cell phones pose a health hazard Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause cancer or other serious health hazards The weight of scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency RF energy Over the past 15 years scientists have conducted hundreds of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy emitted by cell phones While some researchers have reported biological changes associated with RF energy these studies have failed to be replicated The majority of studies published have failed to show an association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell phone and health problems 248 The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the microwave frequency range They also emit RF at substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand by mode Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects by heating tissue exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic energy Very high levels of electromagnetic energy such as is found in X rays and gamma rays can ionize biological tissues lonization is a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal locat
101. UNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION ITS CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS OMISSIONS INTERRUPTIONS DEFECTS DELAY IN OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION COMPUTER VIRUS FAILURE TO CONNECT NETWORK CHARGES AND ALL OTHER DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN Warranty Information 275 ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU NOT WITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING SAMSUNG S TOTAL LIABILITY TO PURCHASER FOR ALL LOSSES DAMAGES CAUSES OF ACTION INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF PURCHASER S USE OF THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID SPECIFICALLY FOR ANY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS EXCLUSIONS AND DISCLAIMERS INCLUDING SECTIONS 9 10 AND 11 SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE 12 U S Government End Users Restricted Rights The Software is licensed only with restricted rights and as
102. USTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY Samsung Telecommunications America STA LLC Headquarters 1301 E Lookout Drive Richardson TX 75082 Customer Care Center 1000 Klein Rd Plano TX 75074 Toll Free Tel 1 888 987 HELP 4357 Internet Address http Avww samsung com Nuance VSuite T9 Text Input and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications Inc or its affiliates in the United States and or other countries ACCESS and NetFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS Co Ltd in Japan and other countries The Bluetooth word mark figure mark stylized B Design and combination mark Bluetooth word mark and B Design are registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG microSD and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association Openwave is a registered Trademark of Openwave Inc Google the Google logo Android the Android logo Android Market Gmail Google Mail Google Maps Google Music Google Talk Picasa YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc Wi Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance Inc Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype Inc 2010 Swype Inc All rights reserved DIVX DivX DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license
103. Vlingo 242 Voice Actions 32 Voice Command 184 Using 61 305 Voice Input Recognition 242 Voice mail Accessing 17 Accessing from another phone 18 Setting up 17 Voice Talk 185 Voicemail 222 Volume Settings Adjusting 224 Vibration Intensity 224 VPN Adding 215 Settings 215 WwW Wait 63 Wait dialing 63 Wallpapers Changing 52 Managing 52 Warranty Information 268 WCDMA 217 Web 188 History 192 Web applications enable downloading 197 306 Widget Power Savings 14 Widgets Adding and Removing 50 Google Talk 45 Moving to a Different Screen 51 My Account 43 Settings 44 178 Stopwatch 209 Wi Fi About 200 Activating 66 200 210 Advanced settings 202 Calling 66 Connecting to 201 Deactivating 202 Direct Connection 212 Manually Adding Network 211 Manually scan for network 202 Settings 210 Status icons 202 WPS Button 211 Wi Fi Calling 8 Activating 67 212 Connection Preferences 67 213 Icons 68 Launching 68 Settings 67 213 World Clock DST Settings 209 WPA2 PSK 204 Y Yahoo 193 YouTube High Qulaity 152 Settings 186 Video Chat 180 Z Zinio 186
104. WYPE By using the on screen keyboard in portrait mode some symbols are not available such as Emoticons or Smileys In SYM mode using Swype you can only enter symbols and numbers from the on screen keyboard Once in SYM mode the text mode key Edit shows neck 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard 2 Tap 1a to configure the keyboard for SYM mode Once in this mode the text input type shows asch 3 Tap the on screen key for the number or symbol you want to enter 4 Touch and hold an on screen key to enter the secondary symbol above the main one on the same key 5 Tap to choose from additional symbols 82 For example TE e To enter amp tap EE and select the amp key e To enter tap ee and draw a small circle over the key atid or To enter tap n3 Wig and then touch and hold the amp key Using the Samsung Keypad This QWERTY keypad can be used to enter text in either a Portrait or landscape orientation The only difference between the two orientations are the sizes of the keys From a screen where you enter text rotate your phone counterclockwise to a landscape orientation The on screen QWERTY keypad displays The Samsung Keypad This phone has a built in QWERTY keypad portrait mode or keyboard landscape mode Using the QWERTY keypad keyboard you can type letter numbers punctuation and other characters Shift key Text
105. a 2 Touch and hold a contact name from the list and select Delete gt OK Contacts 93 Contact List Options Accounts allows you to add and manage mobile accounts on Facebook Linkedin Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Google T Mobile 1 From the Home screen tap JA Video Chat or MobileLife Cntacts 2 Press r The following options display Send email allows you to send an email using your Email Gmail or Delete allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts Messaging account Speed dial settings allows you to review your current speed dial Send eed allows youto sehdartexto pietura Meee entries For more information refer to Speed Dialing on Display options allows you to choose to only display contacts that page 64 have phone numbers sort by Given or Last name display contacts by Given name first or Last name first display contacts stored to your SIM card display contacts stored on your phone and or display contacts stored to other accounts For more information refer to Display Options on page 100 My profile allows you to set up a profile for yourself The information will be the same that you can add for a new contact Press and tap Edit to alter this profile information e Sync contacts allows you to manually synchronize all of your Settings allows you to configure where you save new contacts to or current contacts with their respective accounts view your service numbers or
106. about the COSMOS study can be found at http Awww ukcosmos org index html Health and Safety Information 249 Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence MOBI KIDS MOBI KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy from communication technologies including cell phones and brain cancer in young people This is an international multi center study involving 14 European and non European countries Additional information about MOBI KIDS can be found at http www creal cat programes recerca en_projectes creal view php ID 39 Surveillance Epidemiology and End Results SEER Program of the National Cancer Institute The National Cancer Institute NCI actively follows cancer statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of new cases for brain cancer If cell phones play a role in risk for brain cancer rates should go up because heavy cell phone use has been common for quite some time in the U S Between 1987 and 2005 the overall age adjusted incidence of brain cancer did not increase Additional information about SEER can be found at http seer cancer gov Cell Phone Industry Actions Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a number of steps including the following 250 Support needed research on possible biological ef
107. aid Plus account Launch the Web browser to access your account Opening an Email 1 2 From the Home screen tap td gt Email Tap the account name field upper right to open the complete email account list page Select an email account and tap an email message Refreshing Email messages 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap kd gt Email Select an email account e f you are already in an email account tap the account name field upper right to open the complete email account list page e Select an available email account Press and then tap Refresh Composing Email 1 2 From the Home screen tap kd gt Email Tap the account name field upper right to open the complete email account list page Tap Inbox gt Compose Enter the recipient s email address in the To field e If you are sending the email message to several recipients separate the email addresses with a comma You can add as many message recipients as you want Press and then tap Add Cc Bcc to add additional carbon copy recipients e Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients e Use the Bce field to blind copy additional recipients Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject 7 Tap the email text field and compose your email message To add an attachment such as image video audio etc tap Attach from the bottom of the screen and make a category selection Tap the file
108. ailable applications By default applications are displayed as an Alphabetical grid Scroll across the screens and locate your desired application Touch and hold the on screen icon The new shortcut then appears to hover over the current screen Understanding Your Device 49 6 While still holding the on screen icon position it on the current screen Once complete release the screen to lock the shortcut into its new position To add a shortcut via the Add to Home window 50 1 Press fay to go to the Home screen Navigate to a screen with an empty area Touch and hold an empty area of the screen From the Add to Home window tap Shortcuts Scroll up or down the list and tap a selection To delete a shortcut 1 Press ay to go to the Home screen 2 Touch and hold the desired shortcut This unlocks it from its location on the current screen 3 Drag the shortcut over the Remove tab a and release it Adding and Removing Widgets Widgets are self contained applications that can be placed on any screen Unlike shortcuts widgets appear as applications To add a Widget 1 Press fay to go to the Home screen 2 Touch and hold an empty area of the screen 3 From the Add to Home window tap Widgets The available widgets appear within a scrollable area across the bottom of the screen 4 Scroll left or right across the bottom of the screen and then tap an available Widget to place i
109. ain communication apps such as Gmail You can customize your Home screen by doing the following e Adding Deleting and Rearranging screens e Adding and Removing Shortcuts e Adding and Removing Widgets e Creating Folders e Changing the Background Wallpapers Understanding Your Device 47 Adding and Deleting Screens Your phone comes with seven screens You can delete these screens and then add them back later Note These screens can be deleted and re arranged Important Your phone can only contain at most seven screens and at least one screen To delete a screen 1 Press cay gt and then tap K Edit 2 Touch and hold then drag the undesired screen down to the Remove tab il 3 Press fay to return to the main Home screen 48 To add a screen fay gt E ana then tap gt ait 2 Tap the Add icon The newly added screen appears as the last page 3 Press gt to return to the main Home screen 1 Press Rearranging the Screens Fay gt Ee ana then tap gt Eai 2 Touch and hold a screen and then drag it into its new location Upper left is screen position 1 and bottom right is screen last screen 1 Press Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts The device comes with four Primary shortcuts Phone Contacts Messaging and Applications Home As long as the menu is displayed in a Customizable grid you can replace the Phone Contacts and Messaging shortcuts with oth
110. ains a description of each application available via both the Primary shortcuts area and via the Applications screens If the application is already described in another section of this user manual then a cross reference to that particular section is provided For more information refer to Menu Navigation on page 37 Note Some applications might be updated after connection This would require a user to follow the on screen instructions to update the related application icon and features 411 amp More Provides more than just single tap access to directory assistance and other portals Available categories include 411 Directory Assistance Current Weather and more For more information refer to 477 amp More on page 153 Accounts and sync Allows you to add applications and determine which type of account information you want to synchronize with your Contact list For more information refer to Accounts and Synchronization on page 235 AllShare Allows you to share your on device media content with other external devices using DLNA Digital Living Network Alliance and built in AllShare technology Samsung s AllShare makes staying connected easy For more information refer to AllShare on page 154 Books Use Google Books to read over 3 million ebooks on the go For more information refer to Books on page 155 FE Calculator x Launches the on screen calculator application
111. ait Landscape Night Sports Party Indoor Beach Snow Sunset Dawn Fall color Firework Text Candlelight and Backlight Helpful tips are shown for each scene mode at the bottom of the display screen Exposure value allows you to adjust the brightness level by moving the slider Focus mode allows you to set this option to Auto focus Macro or Face detection Use Auto focus for all other focal situations e Auto focus automatically focus the image based on the focus area e Macro allows you to take close up pictures Timer allows you to set a timer for how long to wait before taking a picture Options include Off 2 sec 5 sec and 10 sec Effects allows youto change the color tone or apply special effects to the photo Options include None Negative Black and white and Sepia Resolution allows you to set the image size to either 5M 2560x1920 W4M 2560x1536 3 2M 2048x1536 W2 4M 2048x1232 2M 1600x1200 W1 5M 1600x960 W0 9M 1280x720 W0 4M 800x480 or 0 3M 640x480 Settings continued White balance allows you to set this option to one of the following choices Auto Daylight Cloudy Incandescent or Fluorescent ISO ISO determines how sensitive the light meter is on your digital camera Choose from Auto 100 200 or 400 Use a lower ISO number to make your camera less sensitive to light a higher ISO number to take photos with less light or Auto to letthe camera automatically adju
112. all if necessary e Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an automobile Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or near the windshield of an automobile In other states the law may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in the automobile Be sure to consult the state and local laws or ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in an automobile Failure to comply with these restrictions could result in fines penalties or other damages Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the driver s clear view of the street and traffic Never use wireless data services such as text messaging Web browsing or e mail while operating a vehicle Never watch videos such as a movie or clip or play video games while operating a vehicle For more information go to http www ctia org Battery Use and Safety Important Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or damage Most battery issues arise from improper handling of batteries and particularly from the continued use of damaged batteries e Do not disassemble crush puncture shred or otherwise attempt to change the form of your battery Do not put a high degree of pressure on the battery This can cause leakage or an internal short circuit resulting in overheating e Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids L
113. allowed by applicable law transfer or assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited What must you do to obtain warranty service To obtain service under this Limited Warranty you must return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate container for shipping accompanied by the sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the original date of purchase the serial number of the Product and the seller s name and address To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product please call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1 888 987 4357 If SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this Limited Warranty you must pay all parts shipping and labor charges for the repair or return of such Product You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for warranty service as some or all of the contents may be deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service What are the limits on SAMSUNG s liability THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF SAMSUNG S RESPONSIBILITIES AND THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR WITHOUT LIMITATION COMM
114. amiliarize yourself with your service provider s privacy policy Samsung is not responsible for the privacy or any other practices of such service providers Although your messages will be transmitted through Samsung s servers Samsung will not process the content or headers of your messages for any purpose other than as necessary to deliver and manage your messages unless otherwise required by law In connection with certain services accessible via the Service Samsung may cooperate with your operator and other third parties Samsung may receive from such third parties certain device specific non personal information such as device serial number of the devices sold by the operator with preinstalled software for the Service Such information may be used for aanalyzing the activation of the Service LIMITATION OF LIABILITY THE SERVICE IS PROVIDED ON AS IS AND AS AVAILABLE BASIS TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY THE LAW AND Warranty Information 281 SUBJECT TO THE TERMS SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SERVICE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR OR VIRUS FREE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY THE LAW AND SUBJECT TO THE TERMS NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NON INFRINGEMENT OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IS MADE IN RELATION TO THE AVAILABILITY ACCURACY RELIABILITY OF THE SERVICE INCLUDING ANY INFORMATION OR CON
115. an also access an entry s context menu by touching and holding an entry then tapping Edit 4 Edit the contact information then tap Save Edit Del me Context loin contact Menu Send contact information Remove from favorites Add to group Adding a Number to an Existing Contact 1 From the Home screen tap B 2 Touch and hold an entry and select Edit to reveal the Contact entry s details screen page 95 Edit contacts 3 Touch a phone number field and enter a phone F mente XXX 555 5555 number aen Tap EJ nie PO QWERTY keyboard to Finernetcat remove a previously entered phone number Save Cancel i Contact Details Screen e Tap to enter an additional phone number e Tap to remove a previously entered phone number 4 Enter additional information such as Email IM Groups Ringtone Postal address Organization or More fields to input additional category information e The More field contains the following options Notes Nickname Website Birthday and Anniversary e Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields and categories 5 Tap Save to complete and store the new entry Deleting Contacts This option allows you to delete your contacts You can delete all your entries from your phone s memory your SIM card FDN or All Important Once Contacts List entries are deleted they cannot be recovered 1 From the Home screen tap
116. and Mobile HotSpot For more information refer to USB Tethering on page 202 Mobile HotSpot This feature allows you to turn your phone into a Mobile hotspot The feature works best when used in conjunction with HSPA 4G data services although 3G service can also be used Important The Mobile HotSpot can not be active at the same time as Wi Fi Please close your Wi Fi connection prior to launching the service For more information refer to Mobile HotSpot on page 203 VPN settings The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual Private Networks VPNs Important Before you can use a VPN you must establish and configure one Adding a VPN Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to use PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol L2TP Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol L2TP IPSec PSK Pre shared key based L2TP IPSec or L2TP IPSec CRT Certificate based L2TP IPSec 1 Press fay gt l E and then tap K Settings gt Wireless and network gt VPN settings 2 Tap Add VPN To establish a PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 1 Establish a VPN name a name for this connection 2 Set the VPN server 3 Enable Encryption if desired 4 Set the DNS search domains To establish a L2TP Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol 1 Establish a VPN name a name for this connection Set the VPN server Enable L2TP secret Set L2TP secret yo PF Ye NM Set the DNS search domains
117. ap to enter an additional phone number Tap e to remove a previously entered phone number Enter additional information such as Email IM Groups Ringtone Postal address Organization or More fields to input additional category information e The More field contains the following options Notes Nickname Website Birthday and Anniversary e Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields and categories Tap Save to complete and store the new entry To save a Number from your Keypad 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap is Phone Enter a phone number using the on screen dialpad Tap Add to Contacts gt Create contact or select the Contact entry from the on screen list or Press and then tap Add to contacts gt Create contact or select the Contact entry from the on screen list e f you re updating an existing contact tap the entry from the list and proceed to step 5 4 Tap a destination type MobileLife Contacts Google Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Phone or SIM depending on where you want to save the new contact information 5 Tap the Given name and Last name fields and enter aname for this contact 6 Tap the label button to the left of the Phone number field to select a category such as Mobile default Home Work Work Fax Home Fax Pager Other Custom or Callback Note These label entries can change and are dependant on the selected destination type ex Callback m
118. ap Add a search The functions adds additional search shortcuts to the places screen you agree with the terms of use Applications and Development 177 5 On its initial launch tap an available tab New creates a new office document e My Files This is where you keep your documents on this device You can manage documents or send them to others and upload the documents e Recent docs provides a list of recently opened documents e Web files This provides your online storage information at Box net You can also share your documents to others without using email attachments Q Search allows you to search for document files by using a text string Pro Apps Provides access to compatible productivity tools These productivity packs can be accessed from anywhere Note Access to these applications and packs requires you have an active Google account and are logged in prior to connection 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt S Pro Apps e Select an application and follow the on screen download and installation instructions 178 Settings This icon navigates to the sound and phone settings for your phone It includes such settings as display security memory and any extra settings associated with your phone p From the Home screen tap td Applications gt Settings Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings For more information refer to Changing Your Settings on
119. applications installed to use this feature 1 Press fay gt and then tap sO Settings gt Applications gt Manage applications 2 Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data 3 Tap Force stop Clear data or Clear cache Uninstalling Third party Applications Moving Third party Applications to your SD Card a Your phone s built in memory is augmented by using a microSD Important You must have downloaded applications installed to use this feature card to store additional data When the phone s built in memory oo capacity is reached it can be possible to move some applications 1 Press cay gt and then tap OP Settings gt over to the internal microSD card Freeing up memory space on Applications gt Manage applications the phone can help avoid any sluggish performance when the phone has to work harder to manage memory resources 2 Tap the Downloaded tab and select your desired application Important Only certain downloaded applications are capable of being moved from phone to card 3 Tap Uninstall from within the top area of the Application info page 1 Press ay gt and then tap OP Settings gt 4 At the prompt tap OK to uninstall the application Applications gt Manage applications 5 Select a reason for uninstalling the application then tap 2 Tap the Downloaded tab and select your desired 0K application 3 Tap Move to SD card from within the Storage section of the App
120. arm configure and view the World clock use a stopwatch or set a timer The applications display in a tabular format and quickly accessed with the touch of a finger p From the Home screen tap td Applications gt Clock For more information refer to Clock on page 207 Applications and Development 157 Downloads Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current downloaded files Internet and Other 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt B Downloads 2 Tap an available file category tab Internet downloads or Other downloads and select the desired file Compatible document formats can be opened by Polaris Office page 177 Email Email enables you to review and create email using most email services The device alerts you when you receive an email message For more information refer to Email on page 115 Files Organize and store data images and more in your own personal file folders Files are stored to the memory card in separate user defined folders p gt From the Home screen tap co Applications gt D a D Fites For more information refer to Files on page 136 158 Gallery The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos For photos you can also perform basic editing tasks view a slideshow set photos as wallpaper or caller image and share as a picture message p From the Home screen tap td Applications gt Ea Gallery For
121. as music videos or other types of files and media 2 To activate the camera video music player and other dependant media or applications Important Your device can support microSDHC cards up to 32GB capacity SD card Overview After mounting an SD card in the device you can use your computer to access and manage the SD card Important If access to the external SD card is not available download and install the USB drivers microSD Icon Indicators The following icons show your microSD card connection status at a glance e the contents of the microSD card are being scanned e the card is being prepared for use and for mounting A e the card has been improperly removed Memory Card 53 Important DO NOT remove a microSD card while the device is accessing or transferring files Doing so will result in loss or damage of data Make sure your battery is fully charged before using the microSD card Your data may become damaged or lost if the battery runs out while you are using the microSD card Mounting the SD Card To store photos music videos and other applications You must mount install the SD card prior to use Mounting the SD card establishes a USB connection with your computer Important You must enable USB storage to mount the SD card 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Storage 2 Tap Mount SD card Connecting to the SD card 1 Insert the SD card into the external SD card slo
122. aser acknowledges and agrees that your use of any third party application is governed by such third party application provider s Terms of Use License Agreement Privacy Policy or other such agreement and that any information or personal data you provide whether knowingly or unknowingly to such third party application provider will be subject to such third party application provider s privacy policy if such a policy exists SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER 10 Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third Party Applications SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE AVAILABILITY USE TIMELINESS SECURITY VALIDITY ACCURACY OR RELIABILITY OF OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF OR OTHERWISE RESPECTING THE CONTENT OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG IS DOWNLOADED OR OTHERWISE OBTAINED USE OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION IS DONE AT PURCHASER S OWN DISCRETION AND RISK AND PURCHASER IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGE TO YOUR MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA THAT RESULTS FROM THE DOWNLOADING OR USE OF SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER PURCHASER S PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH TH
123. at date Phone 1 Year Batteries 1 Year Case Pouch Holster 90 Days Other Phone Accessories 1 Year What is not covered This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the Product This Limited Warranty does not cover a defects or damage resulting from accident misuse abnormal use abnormal conditions improper storage exposure to liquid moisture 268 dampness sand or dirt neglect or unusual physical electrical or electromechanical stress b scratches dents and cosmetic damage unless caused by SAMSUNG c defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen d equipment that has the serial number or the enhancement data code removed defaced damaged altered or made illegible e ordinary wear and tear f defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in conjunction or connection with accessories products or ancillary peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG g defects or damage resulting from improper testing operation maintenance installation service or adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG h defects or damage resulting from external causes such as collision with an object fire flooding dirt windstorm lightning earthquake exposure to weather conditions theft blown fuse or improper use of any electrical source i defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception or transmission or viru
124. at which on screen text is spoken by the device Choose from Very slow Slow Normal Fast and Very fast e Language assigns the language used for verbal readout Choose from German Germany English United Kingdom English United States Spanish Spain French France or Italian Italy e Samsung TTS configures the Samsung TTS settings for various languages e Pico TTS configures the pico TTS settings for various languages Changing Your Settings 243 Accessibility Settings This service lets you enable and disable downloaded accessibility applications that aid in navigating your Android device such as TalkBack uses synthesized speech to describe the results of actions KickBack provides haptic feedback for actions and SoundBack plays sounds for various actions Also lets you enable use of the power key to end calls 1 Press fay gt and then tap Ke Settings gt Accessibility Note Initially it might be necessary to download accessibility applications from the Android Market 2 Place a check mark alongside any of these fields to activate the feature Accessibility TalkBack Assistive light Mono audio or Accessibility shortcut 3 Select Call answering ending field to manage these features when a user canswers or ends a call Answering key Automatic answering or The power key ends calls 244 Dock This menu allows you to configure the audio output settings when the device i
125. attery compartment charger which is used for charging the battery is included with your phone Use only approved batteries and chargers Ask your local Samsung dealer for further details Before using your phone for the first time you must fully charge the battery A discharged battery recharges fully in approximately 4 hours Installing Battery J lt a Charging Head Incorrect Getting Started 11 Note Verify that the battery is installed prior to connecting the wall charger If both the wall charger is connected and the battery is not installed the handset will power cycle continuously and prevent proper operation Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the battery can cause the phone to become damaged Important It is recommended you fully charge the battery before using your device for the first time 1 Connect the USB cable to the charging head 2 Locate the Charger Accessory jack 1 3 Insert the USB cable into the device s Charger Accessory jack 2 4 Plug the charging head into a standard AC power outlet The device turns on with the screen locked and indicates both its charge state and percent of charge Warning While the device is charging if the touch screen does not function due to an unstable power supply unplug the USB power adapter from the power outlet or unplug the USB cable from the device 12 Correct Incorrect Note This illustration displays b
126. being able to use the Development feature 1 Press cay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Applications gt Development 2 Tap the USB debugging field to verify the feature is active before connecting your USB cable 3 Using an optional PC data cable connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC Kies Air Kies Air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on the same Wi Fi network You can view and share call logs videos photos music bookmarks ringtones and even send SMS messages from your PC Tip Before beginning it is recommended that you update the Java application running on your machine 1 Sign onto the same Wi Fi network from your phone and from your PC 2 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt Kies air 3 From the Kies air homescreen tap Start 4 If prompted select a network Choose from either Wi Fi or Portable Wi Fi hotspot 5 Write down the on screen URL address Important Both your phone and your computer must be connected to the same Wireless Access Point WAP 6 From your computer enter the URL in your Web browser Connections 199 10 11 12 13 200 If prompted an Access Request prompt is displayed on your device Tap Allow to permit connection between the computer and device On your computer you may be prompted to run a Java plugin for a TransferManagerApplet Click Run Tap the Remember for to
127. ber the moment p gt From the Home screen tap td Applications gt MobileLife Organizer Logging in to MobileLife To use MobileLife Organizer with an existing account 1 3 From the main application screen enter you Email address and shared family password Tap the Shared family password field and enter the appropriate password Tap Sign in To create a new MobileLife Organizer account 1 2 From the main application screen tap Create an account Enter the necessary information such as First name Email address Household name and a Shared password Read the terms of use and place a check mark along side the field to confirm your acceptance of the terms Tap Done Application Menu Help More Cozi T Mobile Support ev F Mobile December 13 Tamor m Cana recermibar 14 To Calendar December MON December 12 Today THU Decemberis TRE December 16 Current screen Menu Applications and Development 169 Create an appointment 1 5 From the MobileLife main screen locate the Application menu and tap Calendar Tap Menu from the bottom of the screen Select New Appointment Enter all Appointment Details and select household members to be included in the appointment These members can be added by entering their name Email address phone number and assigning a color Tap Save More for Me Provides customized offers di
128. bile networks gt Network Mode 2 Tap GSM WCDMA Auto mode A check mark displays next to this option to indicate that it is active This is the default mode for this phone Using the 2G EDGE Network If you are not using applications that require the 3G network speed any application that accesses the network or uses a browser using the 2G network saves battery life 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Wireless and network gt Mobile networks gt Network mode 2 Tap GSM only A check mark displays next to this option to indicate that it is active Note Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time Changing Your Settings 217 Using the 3G Network If you are using applications that require the 3G network speed follow these instructions to connect to the 3G network 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt Mobile networks gt Network mode 2 Tap WCDMA only A check mark displays next to this option to indicate that it is active Network Operators Using this feature you can view the current network connection You can also scan and select a network operator manually or set the network selection to Automatic 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt Mobile networks 2 Tap Network operators The current network connection displays at the bottom of the list Important You must deactivate data serv
129. ble you can remove the previous SIM and replace it with the new ISIM card Installing and Removing the SIM card To install the SIM card 1 Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket until the card clicks into place 2 Make sure that the card s gold contacts face into the phone and that the upper left angled corner of the card is positioned as shown Ea Incorrect Correct To remove the SIM card 1 Remove the battery cover 2 Carefully place your fingernail into the end of the SIM slot and push the card slightly out 3 Carefully slide the SIM card out of the SIM card socket Note If the card is not inserted correctly the phone will not detect it and no service will be available If this happens turn off the phone remove the card and reinstall the card in the correct orientation Installing the microSD Memory Card Your phone supports an optional external microSD or microSDHC memory card for storage of media such as music pictures video and other files The SD card is designed for use with this mobile phone and other devices Note microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 4GB microSDHC memory card types can range from 4GB to up to 32GB Note This device supports up to a 32GB microSDHC memory card Since the device comes with 2GB of built in memory its maximum total storage capacity is 34GB 1 Locate the microSD card slot on the side of the phone Getting Started 9 2
130. c functions and any posting by you is considered public information available to other users Any posting is governed in accordance with the third party service and content providers terms and conditions You should take care not to use personal information in your screen name or other information that might be publicly available to other users Archived Information We maintain archives of web logs database and other systems and information in relation to the Service Please note that it is possible some of this information may remain archived after we delete the information from its active database We maintain archives for disaster recovery legal and other non marketing purposes How can I update my profile You can help us maintain the accuracy of your profile by notifying us when you change zip postal code country of residence age range or e mail address If at any time you wish to update your information or stop receiving communication from us sign in to the Service and then select update your profile to change your preferences CONTESTS AND SWEEPSTAKES Registration may be required to enter promotions such as contests and sweepstakes on Social Hub These registration or entry processes may require your submission of personal information such as your first and last name street address city state and zip code e mail address telephone number and date of birth The entry page and or rules for the promotion will pr
131. cay gt and then tap Keys Settings gt Applications gt Development Important These features are used for development purposes only USB Debugging This feature is used for development purposes only Allowing Mock Locations This feature is used for development purposes only If you are a developer who is testing a GPS applications using this device you can tell the device that the phone is at different GPS locations In other words the phone is allowed to mock the coordinates Accounts and Synchronization Your phone provides the ability to synchronize data from a variety of different sources or sites These accounts can range from Google a Corporate Microsoft Exchange Email Server and other social sites such as Facebook Twitter and MySpace Corporate and Google accounts provide the ability to synchronize Calendar events and Contacts To enable the auto sync feature 1 Press Al gt and then tap Settings gt Accounts and sync 2 Tap Auto sync A green checkmark indicates the feature is enabled This feature enables the synchronization of data between your phone and external sites or servers e The three main components are Contacts Email and Calendar Events Before these can be synchronized they must be added to the managed accounts list e Background data allows your phone to use data in the background Changing Your Settings 235 Synchronizing a Google Account By default there are no
132. ce Deleting a device from your list removes its connection record and upon reconnection would require that you re enter all the previous pairing information 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page touch and hold the name of the previously paired device from the bottom of the page This opens the connected device s menu options 3 Tap Unpair to delete the paired device Sending Contacts via Bluetooth Depending on your paired devices settings and capabilities you may be able to send pictures Contact information or other items using a Bluetooth connection Note Prior to using this feature Bluetooth must first be enabled on both your phone and the external device and the recipient s device must be visible 1 Verify your Bluetooth is active and your phone is visible 2 From the Home screen tap B Contacts 3 Touch and hold the entry from the list to display the on screen context menu 4 Tap Send namecard via gt Bluetooth and select a paired external Bluetooth device Note The external Bluetooth device must be visible and communicating for the pairing to be successful 5 A Bluetooth share notification displays in your notifications list Enable Downloading for Web Applications Important Before you can download a web application you must insert an SD into the phone and enable the Unknown sources feature enables downloading For more information refer to
133. cemail Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a voicemail message and listen to the any message they want without being limited to chronological order 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt Visual Voicemail led 2 Read the on screen information and tap Next A list of the voicemail messages displays Important If this is your first time to ever access Visual Voicemail you may be prompted to enter a new PIN code and tap Next to activate Visual Voicemail Note You must subscribe to Visual Voicemail service to use this feature Charges may apply Please contact your service provider for further details 3 Tap an on screen voicemail message to play it back 18 Task Manager Your device can run applications simultaneously with some applications running in the background Sometimes your device might seem to slow down over time and the biggest reason for this are background applications These are applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and are still active but minimized The Task manager not only lets you see which of these applications are still active in the background but also easily lets you choose which applications are left running and which are closed Note The larger the number of applications running on your phone the larger the energy drain on your battery Task Manger Overview p From the Home screen tap td Applications gt Task manager or P
134. characters A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled Next word prediction predicts the next word you are like to enter A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled e Auto append automatically adds predictions to the word you are typing A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled e Auto substitution allows the device to automatically replace misspelled or miskeyed words This option reduce typos A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled e Regional correction automatically tries to correct errors caused when you tap keys adjacent mark indicates the feature is 0 the correct keys A green check enabled e Recapture sets the device to redisplay the word suggestion list after selecting the wrong wo d from the list XT9 my words allows you to add new words to the built in XT9 dictionary Tap Add word Use the Register to XT9 my words field to enter the new word Tap Done to store the new word e XT9 auto substitution allows you to create a word rule by adding words for automatic substitution during text entry for example youve becomes you ve Tap the XT9 auto substitution field Flick up or down to review the current list of word substitutions Press E and then tap Add Enter the original word that will be replaced in the Shortcut field for example youve Enter the substitute word that will be used in the
135. cipant When you have two participants Manage Conference in a multi party session it Call might be necessary to place one of those participants on hold so that a private conversation can be held with a single caller While you are ina multi party call 1 Press and then tap Manage Conference Call Conference call Tap the Manage Conference Call image 2 Tap adjacent to the participants you would like to split from the current multi line call The list displays the callers in the order they were dialed Call Functions and Contacts List 71 Split Caller End Call 3 Tap the participant to which you want to speak privately You can now talk privately to that person while the other participants can continue to converse with each other If there is only one other participant that person is placed on hold To return to the multi party call tap the Merge icon All of the multi party call participants can now hear each other Dropping One Participant i 2 72 Press and then tap Manage Conference Call Tap to the right of the number to drop The participant is disconnected and you can continue the call with the other participant Tap f to end your conversation with the remaining End call caller Call Waiting You can answer an incoming call while you have a call in progress if this service is supported by the network and you have previously set the Call waiting option to Activate You are n
136. cipient r 3 Tap 2 e Contacts to select a recipient from your Contacts list valid entries must have a wireless phone number or email address e Recent to select a recipient from a list of recently sent messages e Groups to select a recipient from the Group list e Favorites to select a recipient from the Favorites list to select from one of the following Messages 107 4 If adding a recipient from either Recent Contacts or Group tap the contact to place a checkmark then tap Add The contact displays in the recipient field Note Delete any unnecessary members in the list by selecting the trash can icon and deleting unwanted entries 5 Tap the Tap to enter message field and use the on screen keypad to enter a message For more information refer to Text Input Methods on page 77 6 Add more recipients by tapping either the Enter recipient field or Fy and selecting recipients 7 Review your message and tap Send 8 If you have more than one recipient the same text message is sent to all recipients in the Enter Recipients field Note If you exit a message before you tap send the message automatically saves as a draft 108 Quick Messaging a Number from the Contacts List 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Contacts 2 Locate a contact from the list 3 In a single motion touch and slide your finger over the number by going to the left This action addresses a new text message to the recipient
137. confirmation window tap OK Connections 191 Emptying the Cookies A cookie is a small file placed on your phone by a website during navigation In addition to containing some site specific information a cookie can also contain some personal information such as a username and password which might pose a security risk if not properly managed You can clear these cookies from your phone at any time 1 From the Home webpage press and then tap More gt Settings gt Clear all cookie data 2 Tap OK to delete the cookies or tap Cancel to exit Using Web History The History list displays a list of the most recently viewed websites These entries can be used to return to previously unmarked web pages 1 From the Home webpage tap A gt History tab A list of the most recently viewed websites displays 2 Tap an entry to display the webpage or Press and then tap Clear history to delete the current History list 192 Using Most Visited The Most visited list provides you with a list of the most visited and bookmarked websites These entries are used to return to previously unmarked web pages 1 From the Home webpage tap gt Most visited tab A list of your most frequently visited webpages displays The most frequently visited web pages display at the top of the list 2 Tap any entry to display the selected webpage Browser Settings To configure browser settings 1 From the Home screen tap amp wer
138. count setup e Tap the account name field upper right to open the complete email account list page Account name e ull 3 56 PM Aik Inbox 15 pats gmail com Meal Planner Homemade Cozi Dec 6 Come back to Qik Video Hi Tap Add account and follow the same steps as referenced in the previous section For more information refer to Signing into Google Mail on page 123 Google Talk Google Talk is a free Windows and web based application for instant messaging offered by Google Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail accounts This application also allows for video calling to other compatible devices where the user is both logged in to gmail and using this same application Note Before using this application you must first have an active Gmail account available and be currently logged in 1 From the Home screen tap td gt ar Talk Note If you are not already logged into Google refer to the instructions for signing in on page 123 2 Begin using Google Talk Note The Network confirms your login and processes This could take up to 5 minutes to complete Messages 125 Section 8 Multimedia This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your phone including the Camera Camcorder Music Player and how to manage your photos images and sounds You ca
139. creen tap kd Applications gt amp Web For more information refer to Web on page 188 Yelp Yelp is an online urban city guide that helps people find cool places to eat shop drink relax and play Its the fun and easy way to find review and talk about what s great in your world 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Yelp 2 If prompted log into your existing account or create a new one 3 Follow the on screen prompts Applications and Development 185 YouTube YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload and share videos and view them in MPEG 4 format 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt YouTube 2 When the screen loads you can begin searching and viewing posted videos To configure YouTube Settings p gt Press 3 and then tap Settings and configure the following parameters e High quality on mobile when enabled allows you to start all videos in high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile network e Caption font size allows you to set the font size used by on screen captions Choose from Small Medium Large or Extra Large e Uploads allows you to specify network preferences for uploads Choose from Only when on WiFi or On any network e Clear search history allows you to clear any previous YouTube searches from appearing within the search box e SafeSearch filtering allows you to configure block settings for videos containing restricted c
140. d registered prior to using Media Hub Note Media Hub usage is based on service availability Important You must be using an active Wi Fi 4G connection to preview and download a media file The internal memory acts as a storage location for your downloaded rentals or purchases 140 Installing the Samsung Account App 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt w Media Hub 2 When prompted tap OK and follow the on screen instructions to download the application from the Android market 3 If the installation is blocked e Tap Settings to access the Applications menu e Place a checkmark on the Unknown sources field By enabling this option you are able to load applications from the Android market that might not be known to the system e Tap OK to accept the change Tap to return to the previous Attention screen 4 From the Attention screen tap OK gt Install gt Done to complete the installation of the Samsung Account application Creating a New Media Hub Account Before you can rent or buy media you must first create both a Samsung and MediaHub account Enter the required information 1 From the Home screen tap td w Media Hub Applications gt Important If prompted with an Install blocked message for the Samsung Account app tap Settings and activate the Unknown sources option and retry to register 2 If prompted read the Terms and Conditions and tap Accept to continue or D
141. d online on the FCC s website through http transition fcc gov oet rfsafety sar html To find information that pertains to a particular model phone this site uses the phone FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the case of the phone Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to find the number Once you have the FCC ID number for a particular phone follow the instructions on the website and it should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone Additional SAR information can also be obtained at http Awww fcc gov encyclopedia specific absorption rate sar cellular telephones FCC Part 15 Information to User Pursuant to part 15 21 of the FCC Rules you are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Samsung could void your authority to operate the device This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Health and Safety Information 253 Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate
142. d the song to a playlist 0r Tap om gt mes gt Add to playlist to add the song to a playlist Tap the ARTIST name to view songs related to this artist Tap the ALBUM name to view or play other songs on the album The Now playing screen contains several buttons that you can tap to control the playback of songs albums and playlists CS Si vin 2 Tap to go back to the previous song Touch and hold to scan backward through the current song Tap to resume playback Tap to pause playback Tap to advance to the next song Touch and hold to scan forward through the current song When Shuffle mode is enabled via Show Options songs play in random order When disabled as shown songs play in the order they appear in List view Also visible when ml is tapped When Shuffle mode is enabled via Show Options songs play in random order When enabled songs play in random order Also visible when baal is tapped Tap to repeat the current song repeat all songs or disable repeat mode Also visible when mal is tapped Creating a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt T Music 2 Tap an album or song list and play a song 3 Tap adjacent to the song name and select Add to playlist 4 Tap New playlist gt Playlist name field to enter a name for the playlist 5 Tap OK to save the new playlist Adding Songs to Playlists 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt G Music 2 Ta
143. day checkbox if you will be using Kies air with the same PC later From your PC a security warning may be displayed asking if you want to run this application Click Run to continue On your PC the Kies air screen is displayed On your phone the icon appears at the top of your screen Follow the on screen instructions to view and share information between your phone and PC Click a link from the left navigation pane to access one of several device file categories such as Device Name provides an overview of all the main categories Photos Videos Music Ringtones Bookmarks lessages Call Log Contacts e File Explorer Language settings 14 To exit the Kies air application tap Stop on your device then close out the Web browser on your computer Wi Fi About Wi Fi Wi Fi short for wireless fidelity is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local Area Networks WLAN Wi Fi communication requires access to an existing and accessible Wireless Access Point WAP These WAPs can either be Open unsecured as within most Hot Spots or Secured requiring knowledge of the Router name and password Note After you complete a connection to an active Wi Fi network the Wi Fi Calling feature will automatically be enabled Activating Wi Fi By default your device s Wi Fi feature is turned off deactivated Activating Wi Fi allows your device to discover and connect to compatible in range WAPs Wireless Access Points 1 Pr
144. devices have been rated Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or a label located on the box The ratings are not guarantees Results will vary depending on the user s hearing device and hearing loss If your hearing device happens to be vulnerable to interference you may not be able to use a rated mobile device successfully Trying out the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal needs M Ratings Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled M4 is the better higher of the two ratings M ratings refer to enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not operate in telecoil mode T Ratings Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled T4 is the better higher of the two ratings T ratings refer to enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in telecoil mode Hearing devices may also be rated Your hearing aid manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you find this rating Higher ratings mean that the hearing device is relatively immune to interference noise Under the current industry standard American National Standards Institute ANSI C63 19 the hearing aid and wireless mobile device rating values are added
145. e SD Gard lt c2 cc 02cacasae coowdoenawae AENEA 53 POWER SAVINGS E sv ce eee T 14 SD card OverVieW aracnean EEN EEEREN DE 53 nitial Device Configuration a n aaea 14 Section 4 Call Functions and Contacts List 56 Switching the Device On or Off 005 15 Displaying Your Phone Number 0 0008 56 Locking and Unlocking the Device 15 MakingaCall 00 cc0 cceeeceee es eee ve eeees 56 Creating a New Google Account 05 16 EndingaCall cc cece enina aea GNA NA 57 Signing into Your Google Account s an aaea 16 Making Emergency Calls n nunana onanan 57 Retrieving your Google Account Password 17 Dialing OPUCNS s cso i ice KAGE E EEE EEN 58 OOE S a a Aa aaa EENAA 17 Answering a Call 0 0 0c cece cece e cece eee 59 Visual Voicemail 0 e eee eee eee 18 Managing Reject Calls 0 0 00 e eee eee 60 Task Manager nn eee eee cere eee eee 18 Using Voice Command 2 0 0 ccc e eee e ee 61 Section 2 Understanding Your Device ee 20 Using Voice Talk cos nc cee vee dew edb e dene eaa 61 Features of Your Phone 0 eeeeeee eee 20 Intemational Calls 2 05 0 ccncesce niri nini de doe dee a ey 62 COME VIGW saccat ts Doe te wets tere cere acted wean tenet 21 PauSe DIANING sa csa5 nacdesenscccwanania cous eee coe 63 Back View of Your Phone cceeeeee
146. e PIN by re entering it and tap OK to confirm Your phone now requires you to enter this PIN number in order to unlock the phone Password Lock and Unlock 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Location and security 2 Tap Set up screen lock 3 Tap Password 4 Enter a password using the keypad and tap Continue to confirm the password 5 Confirm the password by re entering it and tap OK to confirm 230 Disable USB debugging mode When enabled USB debugging is disabled while the screen is locked 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Location and security 2 Tap Disable USB debugging mode Setting up SIM Card Lock Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on your SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code 1 Press fay gt and then tap Keys Settings gt Location and security 2 Tap Set up SIM card lock 3 Tap Lock SIM card enter your SIM PIN code then tap OK Note You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change your SIM PIN code To change an existing SIM Card PIN 1 Tap Change SIM PIN 2 Enter the old SIM PIN code and tap OK 3 Enter the new SIM PIN code and tap OK 4 Re type the new SIM PIN code and tap OK Password Settings When you create a phone password you can also configure the phone to display the password as you type it instead of using an asterisk 1 Press fa
147. e cell phone Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the head and the cell phone Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones at all For example The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000 In this report a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects Their recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly precautionary it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists Health and Safety Information 251 Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various sources can be obtained from the following organizations updated 10 1 2010 FCC RF Safety Program http Avww fcc gov oet rfsafety e Environmental Protection Agency EPA http www epa gov radtown wireless tech html Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA http Avww osha gov SLTC radiofrequencyradiation Note This web address is case sensitive e National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health NIOSH World Health Organization WHO htto www who int peh emf en e International Commission on Non lonizing Radiation Protection http www icnirp de Health Protection Agency http Avww hpa org uk Topics Radiation e US Food and Drug Administration http www fda gov Radiation Emi
148. e connection status received signal strength phone battery level and time Receiver allows you to hear the other caller and the different ring tones or sounds offered by your phone 10 Proximity Sensor detects how close an object is to the surface of the screen This is typically used to detect when your face is pressed up against the screen such as during a phone call While talking on the phone the sensor detects talk activity and locks the keypad to prevent accidental key presses 11 12 13 14 15 Light Sensor lets you use the ambient light level to adjust the screen brightness contrast This sensor decreases screen brightness in dim light In a bright light condition outdoors the sensors cause the device to increase the brightness and contrast for better viewing e In dim light conditions the device increases the screen brightness to compensate Volume key allows you to adjust the ringer volume in standby mode with the phone open or adjust the voice volume during a call When receiving an incoming call Pressing the volume key down mutes the ring tone microSD Card Slot internal allows you use a microSD card to expand the memory of your phone Power End key ends a call or switches the phone off and on Press and hold for two seconds to turn off Silent mode Airplane mode or to turn the phone on or off Headset jack allows you to connect a hands free headset so you can listen to music
149. e next set of numbers only after tapping Send This is indicated in the number string as a semicolon 1 From the Home screen tap ind and use the on screen keypad to enter the phone number 2 Press and then tap Add 2 sec pause This feature adds an automatic two second pause 3 Use the keypad to enter the additional numbers that will be dialed automatically after the second pause Tip You can create pauses longer than three seconds by entering multiple 3 sec pauses 4 Tap A Wait Dialing Inserting a Wait into your dialing sequence means that the phone waits until it hears a dial tone before proceeding with the next sequence of numbers 1 From the Home screen tap KX and use the on screen keypad to enter the phone number 2 Press and then tap Add wait This feature causes the phone to require your acceptance before sending the next set of entered digits 3 Tap A 4 Once prompted tap Send to dial the remaining digits Call Functions and Contacts List 63 Redialing the Last Number Setting Up Speed Dial Entries The phone stores the numbers of the calls you ve dialed snail Sneed dial locaion ihi oi Neon i r z ae ses mportant speed dial location Is reserved tor Voicemail No other received or missed if the caller is identified number can be assigned to this slot To recall any of these numbers 1 From the Home screen tap m g 2 Tap the Logs tab to display the list
150. e of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of the Product To opt out you must send notice by e mail to optout sta samsung com with the subject line Arbitration Opt Out You must include in the opt out e mail a your name and address b the date on which the Product was purchased c the Product model name or model number and d the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number as applicable if you have it the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found i on the Product box ii on the Product information screen which can be found under Settings iii on a label on the back of the Product beneath the battery if the battery is removable and iv on the outside of the Product if the battery is not removable Alternatively you may opt out by calling 1 888 987 4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of the Product and providing the same information These are the only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure Opting out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way and you will continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty Severability If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or unenforceable such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited Warranty Warranty Information 271 P
151. e the new alarm event Turning Off an Alarm p gt To stop an alarm when it sounds touch and slide outside the large on screen circle Setting the Snooze Feature gt To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds touch and slide outside the large on screen circle The Snooze feature must first be set in the alarm settings World Clock This feature allows you to find out what time it is another part of world 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Clock 2 Tap the World clock tab 3 Tap Add city then scroll and select the desired city or tap in the search field to locate a city To assign DST settings 1 Locate a desired city from the World Clock list 2 Touch and hold a city and select DST settings 3 Select a DST setting Automatic Off 1 hour or 2 hours Stopwatch This feature allows you to capture elapsed time while letting the stopwatch keep running 1 From the Home screen tap Clock gt Stopwatch tab 2 Tap Start to start the stopwatch counter Applications gt 3 Tap Lap to begin the lap time counter 4 Tap Stop to stop the counter 5 Tap Restart to restart the lap counter You can have multiple lap times 6 Tap Reset to reset the counter Setting a Timer 1 From the Home screen tap Clock gt Timer tab 2 Tap the hr min or sec field and use the on screen keypad Applications gt to enter the hour minute or seconds The timer plays an
152. e the previous picture 3 Tap the on screen image and use either of the following image menu options e Send via allows you to share a picture using Bluetooth Email Gmail Messaging Wi Fi Kodak and Snapfish e Delete allows you to delete the current image 4 Press to select additional options e Share via allows you to share a picture using AllShare Picasa or Social Hub Set as allows you to assign the current image as either as Contact icon Home screen wallpaper or Lock screen wallpaper For more information refer to Motion Settings on page 237 e More provides you with the additional options such as Copy allows you to copy one or more pictures to a different folder Print allows you to print the current image on a compatible Samsung printer Edit launches the photo editor application For more information refer to Using the Camcorder on page 132 Crop provides an on screen box that allows you to crop the current picture Tap Save to update the image with the new dimensions or tap Discard to ignore any changes Rotate left allows you to rotate the view of the current image ina counterclockwise direction Rotate right allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a Clockwise direction Slideshow adds the selected photo to a custom slideshow Rename allows you to rename the current file Send to allows you to send the file to a Contacts entry N
153. ead the agreement and tap Accept to accept the terms or Command on page 184 tap Exit to close the window Wait for the application to load required first time use files e Voice recorder For more information refer to Voice Recorder on page 184 Applications and Development 183 Videos The Video Player application plays video files stored on your microSD card p gt From the Home screen tap Applications gt Utility gt D Videos For more information refer to Using the Video Player on page 138 Visual Voicemail Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a voicemail message and listen to the any message they want without being limited to chronological order From the Home screen tap td Applications gt led Visual Voicemail For more information refer to Visual Voicemail on page 18 184 Voice Command This application can use your voice to perform operations that you would normally have to do by hand such as dialing a phone number texting a message playing music etc p From the Home screen tap td Applications gt Utility gt Voice command For more information refer to Using Voice Command on page 61 Voice Recorder The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to one minute long and then immediately send it as a message 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt fea Utility gt Voice Recorder 2 Tap Record icon
154. ecline to exit 3 Press and then tap My Profile Important To recover a lost or forgotten Media Hub password press and tap Help Locate the customer service contact information and follow the on screen instructions 4 Use the keypad to enter the required information then tap Create account Follow the on screen instructions to complete your registration 5 Follow the on screen instructions if prompted to validate your email account information 6 From the My Account screen you can edit parameters such as My Payment Methods My Purchases Manage My Devices or Delete All Contents Using Media Hub 1 From the Home screen tap cd Applications gt W Media Hub 2 Press and then tap My Profile 3 Enter your profile information and tap Sign in 4 Atthe Media Hub screen scroll through What s New e What s New shows recently added media that is available for rent or purchase Tap Options and select one of the following options e Movies displays movies that are available for rent or purchase Scroll through the movie categories at the top of the screen Touch a category and movies of that type display e TV Shows displays TV shows that are available for purchase Scroll through the movie categories at the top of the screen Touch a category and TV shows of that type display Multimedia 14 e My Media allows you to view all of the media that you have purchased or rented Touch a media entry to view
155. ed body worn accessories Cell phones marketed in the U S are required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when used against the head and against the body Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones there is no reason to believe that hands free kits reduce risks Hands free kits can be used for convenience and comfort They are also required by law in many states if you want to use your phone while driving Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from RF Radiation Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones there is no reason to believe that accessories which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce risks Some products that claim to shield the user from RF absorption use special phone cases while others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone Studies have shown that these products generally do not work as advertised Unlike hands free kits these so called shields may interfere with proper operation of the phone The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate leading to an increase in RF absorption Children and Cell Phones The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of cell phones from RF exposure including children and teenagers The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to children and teenagers as well e Reduce the amount of time spent on th
156. eded Most applications using this function will periodically query the GPS satellites for your current location each query drains your battery e Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted before charging your device Repeating this process of a complete discharge and recharge can over time reduce the storage capacity of any battery e Turn off Automatic application sync e Use the Power Savings Widget to deactivate hardware functions such as Wi Fi Bluetooth GPS Synchronization or LCD brightness setting e Check the Battery use screen to review what features or functions have been consuming your battery resources e Check the Running Services and close any unnecessary applications e Use the Task manager feature to end shutdown background applications that are still running These minimized applications can over time cause your device to slow down e Turn off any streaming services after use see Running Services Getting Started 13 e Animated wallpapers use processing power memory and more power Change your Live Wallpaper to a non animated Wallpaper gallery or Gallery image Power Savings Active applications Wi Fi Bluetooth GPS Synchronization Location consent or the LCD Brightness functionality all act to drain your battery The Power Savings application was designed to quickly activate turn on or deactivate turn off those functions or applications that use the most battery power 1 From
157. eees 23 Wait DIAG srar scence en cwerndree Beery 63 PHONE DISPLAY s aui lt cesu eqsesnstavg aa e e day da sts a atalane 24 Redialing the Last Number 000000 ee 64 N Ball EIET TT cadre Mime wand eet ena e eld A 24 Speed Dialing saccccccckwioawarseeeenia ENET RS 64 FUMCTION KEYS EEE arses aun wie E 29 WIFE Calling aaar rare rErErE EES angen ments 66 In Calli Options 33 0 cave n ave Avaevehs EE E 69 MEQ GS TAD seers coche seis EEEE REEE EET E E Reateacs 73 Section 5 Entering Text sscscscccsssssessecssssseseseeee 77 Text Input Methods sinc c 02 20 Be bv e ees bade ced eas 77 Selecting the Text Input Method 0005 77 Entering Text Using Swype 2200eeee 78 Using the Samsung Keypad 000e eee e eee 82 Using XT9 Predictive Text ce eee eee ee 85 Section 6 GOMtACts aana 88 ACCOUNTS vaidosa a e e R tere a 88 Contacts LIE aen proe Geen Belek aa Kaaa 89 FING EKE n a A E E S E 91 Contact LETOM aer nina Daai 94 Contact Menu Options cece eee a 95 Contact Entry Options isc s 5 0 sstiana vas as ewer aa 95 Joining Contact Information 0 000 e eee 96 Sending aNamecard wi 6 0 c eee ae eee een 98 Copying Contact Information 0000eeeee 99 Synchronizing Contacts 0 0 0 0 eeeeeee ees 100 DiS Piley O Pt OMS in ise sess ahaa ate ap ET EE 100 Adding more Contacts via Accounts and Sync 101
158. ely shutdown Represented as a blinking icon Displays when connected to the EDGE network Displays when your phone is communicating with the EDGE network Displays when connected to the 3G network 3G indicator is only seen when roaming Understanding Your Device 25 ine HEBHRBHSEG B Displays when your phone is communicating with the 3G network 3G indicator is only seen when roaming Displays when connected to the HSPA network Displays when your phone is communicating with the HSPA network Displays when the phone is connected to a computer using a supported USB cable connection Displays when there is a new text message Displays when an outgoing text message has failed to be delivered Displays when there is a new voicemail message Displays when there is a new visual voicemail message Displays in the notifications window when there is a new Email message Displays in the notifications window when there is anew Gmail message BOG OS g Displays when the time and date for a Calendar Event has arrived For more information refer to Calendar on page 206 Displays when an alarm is set For more information refer to Setting an Alarm on page 207 Displays when the phone is in Silent mode All sounds except media and alarms are silenced and Vibrate mode is set to Never or Only when not in silent mode For more information refer to Silent mode on page 223 Displays wh
159. ems that are searched against Example Web Apps Memo etc Enter a search term and tap a match from the list of suggestions phone search results or previously chosen search matches Once touched the item opens in the appropriate application 0or From the on screen keyboard taping Voice Search U lets you speak into your device s microphone to enter a search term Understanding Your Device 31 Using Additional Voice Search Functions For more information refer to http www google com mobile voice actions From an open Voice Search dialog speak the following words to access additional features e voice actions such as your query allows you to search the web by speaking the search parameters e listen to artist song album allows you to begin listening to the selected song on Slacker radio e send text to recipient message allows you to open the Messaging screen e navigate to address city business name allows you to receive directions via Google maps Use either an Address name Business name business type or other navigation information to get the desired directions e call name allows you to open the phone dial and automatically send email to recipient subject allows you to open your email account and compose a new email message map of location allows you to view a map of an area via Google maps Use either an Address name Business name zip code or other navigation information e go
160. en a new call has been received and T Mobile ID has not yet identified it Name ID identifies unknown callers by Name City amp State Displays when the Sound profile is set to Silent mode and Vibrate is set to Always or Only in silent mode Displays when data synchronization and application sync is active and synchronization is in progress for Gmail Calendar and Contacts Displays when Bluetooth technology is active and enabled S es ES 8 oe Displays when the Bluetooth technology is active and communicating with an external device Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in progress Displays when Wi Fi is connected active and communicating with a Wireless Access Point WAP Displays when Wi Fi is active and there is an available open wireless network Displays when Wi Fi is configured for a direct connection to another compatible device in the same direct communication mode Displays when the Mobile HotSpot feature is active and communicating For more information referto Mobile HotSpot on page 203 Displays when the USB Tethering feature is active and communicating For more information refer to USB Tethering on page 214 Displays when the Wi Fi calling feature is active Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes OAM eB D BAD Displays when the Wi Fi calling feature is active and you are using it with within your current active
161. ense 2 3 The Software is licensed to you only You may not rent lease sub license sell assign pledge transfer or otherwise dispose of the Software on a temporary or permanent basis without the prior written consent of Licensor 3 OWNERSHIP OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS 3 1 Your only right to use the Software is by virtue of this License and you acknowledge that all intellectual property rights in or relating to the Software and all parts of the Software are and shall remain the exclusive property of Licensor or its licensors 3 2 You agree that you will not remove or alter any copyright notices or similar proprietary devices including without limitation any electronic watermarks or other identifiers that may be incorporated in the Software or any copy of the Software 4 CONFIDENTIALITY 4 1 The structure organisation and source code of the Software are the valuable trade secrets and proprietary confidential information of Licensor and its licensors You agree not to provide or disclose any such confidential information in the Software or derived from it to any third party 4 2 The provisions of clause 4 1 will not apply to any information which is 4 2 1 lawfully obtained free of any duty of confidentiality otherwise than directly or indirectly from Licensor or 4 2 2 already in your possession provided that Licensee can show such possession from written records other than as a result of a breach of this clause 4
162. ent within 24 consecutive hours of start of playback Stopping pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not extend the available viewing time e Inno event will rented Media Content be available for a period of more than thirty 30 days or shorter on a title by title basis after the Media Content has been rented g if you begin viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental transaction but do not finish viewing the entire title that rented Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty four 24 consecutive hour period if such period would extend the viewable time beyond the thirty 30 day rental window You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub through any output on your mobile phone including All Share Music Google Music Also known as Google Music allows you to browse shop and playback songs purchased from the Android Market The music you choose is automatically stored in your Google Music library and instantly ready to play or download Registration 1 Navigate to Google music http music google com about 2 Register on Google music site enter my phone number then reboot your device 3 Access the new music tab from within your Android Market application The Music application contains a music player that plays music and other audio files that you copy from your computer 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Music The Music app searches b
163. eo Player 184 Videos 46 Visual Voicemail 46 Voice Command 46 Voice Recorder 46 184 Voice Search 46 185 Voice Talk 46 Yelp 47 185 YouTube 47 186 Zinio 47 Applications and Development 153 Assistive Light 244 Auto Redial 221 Auto Reject Configuration 60 Auto Reject List 60 219 Auto Reject Mode 219 Automatic Answering 219 244 Auto sync Enabling 235 B Back up My Data 238 Backup and Restore 238 Battery Charging 11 Extending Life 13 Installing 10 Low Battery Indicator 13 Removal 11 Saving Power 14 Wall Charger 11 Battery Cover Removal 7 Replace 8 Battery Life Extending 13 Battery Usage 234 Battery Use amp Safety 255 Bing Set Search Engine 193 Blacklist Adding 95 Bluetooth 213 About 194 Activation 213 Change Name 195 Deleting a Paired Device 196 Device Name 213 Disable 194 Disconnecting a Paired Device 196 Enable 194 Paring Devices 195 Scan for Devices 195 Scanning for other Devices 214 Sending Contact Information 197 Sending Contacts Via 197 Sending Namecard 98 Set Visibility 195 Settings 194 Status indicators 194 Switching to Headset during call 70 Turning on and off 194 Visibility 214 Visible Time Out 195 214 Books 155 Sync Google Books 236 Browser Adding bookmarks 191 Deleting bookmarks 191 Emptying cookies 192 Entering a URL 189 Navigation 188 Options 189 Search Engine 193 Settings 192 Bubble Options 111 Cc Calculator Scientific Functions 156 Calendar 206 Creating a
164. er applications so you access the shortcuts that are most frequently used Applications 2 Press and then tap View Type gt Customizable grid 1 Press and then tap 3 Press and then tap Edit gt OK The application pages then appear at the top of the screen the primary shortcuts appear at the bottom and you have the option to also generate a new folder or page to house these application shortcuts 4 Scroll through the application pages at the top and locate the desired application 5 Touch and hold the on screen icon then drag it over one of the four primary shortcuts to replace it The new primary shortcut displays at the bottom of the screen The previous primary shortcuts switches places with your selected icon 6 Press and then tap Save 7 Tap A to return to the Home screen Managing Shortcuts Note To move a shortcut from one screen to another you must carefully touch and hold the shortcut and slowly drag it to the edge of the screen As the shortcut turns light blue you can begin to move it to the adjacent screen If this does not work delete it from its current screen Activate the new screen and then add the selected shortcut To add a shortcut from the Applications screen 1 Press to go to the Home screen E Mobile Select a location screen for your new shortcut by scrolling across your available screens until you reach the desired one Tap Applications H to reveal all your current av
165. er of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information Switch your mobile device off in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle You should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle Health and Safety Information 263 Posted Facilities Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices require you to do so Potentially Explosive Environments Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death Users are advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling point service station Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots fuel storage and distribution areas chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphe
166. es e The first number on this key indicates which page 1 2 or 3 of additional characters is active Using XT9 Predictive Text XT9 is a predictive text system that has next letter prediction and regional error correction Note XT9 is only available when ABC mode is selected XT9 advanced settings are available only if the XT9 field has been selected 1 Press cay gt and then tap OP gt Language and keyboard gt Samsung keypad 0r From within an active text entry screen tap Foy from the bottom of the screen to reveal the Samsung keypad settings screen Entering Text 85 86 Set any of the following options e Portrait keypad types allows you to choose a keypad configuration Qwerty Keypad default or 3x4 Keypad e Input languages sets the input language Tap a language from the available list The keyboard is updated to the selected language XT9 enables predictive text entry mode This must be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings e XT9 advanced settings configuration of more advanced XT9 features For more information refer to Using XT9 Predictive Text on page 86 e Keypad sweeping allows changing between the input modes without having to use the Input Mode key You can sweep the displayed keypad aside in a similar manner to scrolling through the Home screens e Character preview provides an automatic preview of the current character selection within the text string This is helpf
167. es to the offender or legal action or both e While using your device leave some lights on in the room and do not hold the screen too close to your eyes e Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing lights while watching videos or playing games for extended periods If you feel any discomfort stop using the device immediately e Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries When you repetitively perform actions such as pressing keys drawing characters on a touch screen with your fingers or playing games you may experience occasional discomfort in your hands neck shoulders or other parts of your body When using your device for extended periods hold the device with a relaxed grip press the keys lightly and take frequent breaks If you continue to have discomfort during or after such use stop use and see a physician e If your device has a camera flash or light do not use the flash or light Close to the eyes of people or pets 122011 Health and Safety Information 267 Section 14 Warranty Information Standard Limited Warranty What is covered and for how long SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA LLC SAMSUNG warrants that SAMSUNG s handsets and accessories Products are free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for the period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser and continuing for the following specified period of time after th
168. eset From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to the factory default settings 1 Press cay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Privacy You will see a disclaimer 2 Tap Factory data reset gt Reset phone 3 If necessary enter your password and tap Erase everything The phone resets to the factory default settings automatically and when finished displays the Home screen Note Select Format USB storage to also erase all data on the USB storage SD Card amp Phone Storage From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the memory card as well as mount or unmount the SD card For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD card see Using the SD Card on page 53 To view the memory allocation for your external SD card p gt Press Fay gt and then tap Settings gt Storage The available memory displays under the Total space and Available space headings Search Settings You can use your phone s search preferences to configure some aspects of Google Web search for example whether it makes suggestions below the Quick Search Box as you type and what phone features you want to include in searches 1 Press Ol gt and then tap Q Search 2 Press gt Search settings 3 Tap any of the following search parameters to then alter the settings e Google search opens a screen where you can set your Google search preferences Show web suggestions includes search matches
169. ess fay gt l Eal and then tap Settings gt Wireless and network gt Wi Fi settings 2 Tap Wi Fi to activate the feature A checkmark indicates that Wi Fi is active The device scans for available in range wireless networks and displays them under Wi Fi networks on the same screen Connecting to a Wi Fi Network 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt Wi Fi settings The network names and security settings Open network or Secured with WEP of detected Wi Fi networks display in the Wi Fi networks section 2 Tap the network you wish to connect to Note When you select an open network you are automatically connected 3 Enter a wireless password if necessary 4 Tap Connect Manually Add a New Network Connection 1 2 Note Tap Add Wi Fi network Enter the Network SSID the name of your Wireless Access Point Tap the Security field and select a security option This must match the current security setting on your target WAP Enter your WAP s password if the WAP is secure Tap Save to store the new information and connect to the target WAP No prompt to enter the WAP key displays if this is the second time to connect to a previously accessed or secured wireless network The WAP key is required when the device is reset using factory default settings Connections 201 Deactivating Wi Fi 1 Press kay gt and then tap Ke Settings gt Wireless and network gt
170. ess to directory assistance and other portals Available categories include 411 Directory Assistance Current Weather and more 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt R am amp more 2 Tap an on screen option and follow the on screen prompts Choices include 411 Directory Assistance Current Weather Horoscopes and Sports Report Accounts and sync This application allows you to configure general synchronization settings that determine whether the background data is synchronized and whether you automatically synchronize data with the phone p From the Home screen tap Applications gt KO Accounts and sync For more information refer to Accounts and Synchronization on page 235 Applications and Development 153 AllShare This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung mobile phone with your TV streams content and even keeps tabs on who calls or sends text messages with real time on screen monitoring Samsung s AllShare makes staying connected easy Allows users to share their in device media content with other external devices using DLNA certified Digital Living Network Alliance Devices These external devices must also be DLNA compliant Wi Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital multimedia streamer Important You must activate Wi Fi to use this application For more information refer to Wi Fi settings on page 210 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt
171. evice must be visible to successfully pair with an external device Connections 195 3 Tap Scan for devices Your device displays a list of discovered in range Bluetooth devices 4 Tapa device from the list to initiate pairing 5 Enter the passkey or PIN code if needed and tap OK 6 The external device must accept the connection and enter your device s PIN code Once successfully paired to an external device displays in the Status area Note Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetooth compatible devices display and operations may be different and functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth compatible devices Disconnecting a Paired Bluetooth Device Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between the device and your phone but retains the knowledge of the pairing At a later point when you wish to reconnect the device there is no need to setup the connection information again 1 Verify your Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap the previously paired device from the bottom of the page 196 3 Tap OK to confirm disconnection or From the Bluetooth settings page touch and hold the name of the previously paired device and select Disconnect Note Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically if the paired device goes out of range of your phone or it is powered off Deleting a Paired Bluetooth Devi
172. ew Email address or New Phone number Set Default Destination allows you to assign a default action to take after taking an image Contacts New Email address or New Phone number The default storage location for pictures is DCIM gt Camera folder Details files details such as Title Type Date taken Album Location Latitude Longitude etc Multimedia 131 Assigning an Image as a Contact Icon 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt aa Gallery 2 Select a folder location and tap a file to open it 3 With the image displayed press and then tap Set as gt Contact icon 4 Tap a contact to make a selection 5 Crop the image and tap Save Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt T Gallery 2 Select a folder location and tap a file to open it 3 With the image displayed press and then tap Setas 4 Select one of the two options e Home screen wallpaper assigns the current image to the home screen background This image is spread across all available screens e Lock screen wallpaper assigns the selected image to the background for the lock screen 132 5 Touch and drag the crop box anywhere on the picture Touch and drag the sides of the crop box to zoom in or out to create a cropped area 6 Tap Save to assign the wallpaper image Tap Cancel to stop without updating the wallpaper image Editing a Photo You can edit your pho
173. experimental feature that uses Google s networked speech recognition application e Auto full stop automatically inserts a full stop by tapping the space bar twice e Tutorial launches a brief on screen tutorial covering the main concepts related to the Samsung keypad Voice Input and Output Settings Configuring Voice Input Recognition This feature allows the phone to correctly recognize verbal input 1 Press fay gt and then tap Settings gt Voice input and output 2 Tap Voice recognition to confirm the management system used for your voice recognition 3 Select whether voice recognition is managed by either Samsung powered by Vlingo or Google Note Some of the following options or settings are specific to the default Google voice recognition service options can vary based on selection 4 Tap Voice recognition settings to configure the available options to alter the settings associated with this feature e Language selects an input language and associated dialect recognition if available e SafeSearch sets the explicit image filter settings These settings apply to only Google voice search results Choose from Off Moderate or Strict e Block offensive words allows you to block recognition of known offensive words or language A green check mark indicates the feature is active e Personalized recognition allows you to improve speech recognition and accuracy by allowing Google to associate your
174. f messages It also explains the features and functionality associated with messaging Types of Messages Your phone provides the following message types e Text Messages Multimedia Picture Video and Audio Messages e Email and Gmail Messages e Google Talk Message Icons on the Status Bar Icons are displayed on the Status Bar at the top of the display when new messages are received For more information refer to Status Bar on page 24 Creating and Sending Messages The Short Message Service SMS lets you send and receive text messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses To use this feature you may need to subscribe to your service provider s message service The Multimedia Messaging Service MMS lets you send and receive multimedia messages such as picture video and audio messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses To use this feature you may need to subscribe to your service provider s multimedia message service Important When creating a message adding an image a sound file or a video clip to a text message changes the message from a text message to a multimedia message Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and indicate when messages are received and their type For more information refer to Indicator Icons on page 24 1 From the Home screen tap act Messaging gt DA New message m 2 Tap the Enter recipient field to manually enter a re
175. fects of RF for the type of signal emitted by cell phones Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user and e Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current information on cell phone use and human health concerns The FDA also is working with voluntary standard setting bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE the International Commission on Non lonizing Radiation Protection ICNIRP and others to assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect the public Reducing Exposure Hands Free Kits and Other Accessories Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy RF from cell phones and at this point we do not know that there is it is probably very small But if you are concerned about avoiding even potential risks you can take a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone e Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your head and the cell phone Hands Free Kits Hands free kits may include audio or Bluetooth headsets and various types of body worn accessories such as belt clips and holsters Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone is held away from the head in the user s hand or in approv
176. field and select one of the following Melody Vibration Vibration and melody or Briefing Slide the slider bar left or right in the Alarm volume field to decrease or increase the alarm volume A sample of the volume level plays Tap the Alarm tone field and select one of the following Sounds or Go to My files Locate a sound to use as an alarm ringtone then tap OK to activate the ringtone Tap the radio button to activate a tone for the Snooze Tap the field to assign a duration time 3 min 5 min 10 min 15 min or 30 min and snooze repetition 1 time 2 times 3 times 5 times and 10 times Duration indicates the length of time the alarm will remain silent between alarm notifications snooze time Snooze repeat indicates the numbers of snooze sessions that are assigned to this alarm How many times will the snooze silence the alarm Tap the radio button to activate Smart alarm which slowly increases screen brightness and the volume of nature tones to simulate dawn breaking Tap the field to assign a duration time 3 min 5 min 10 min 15 min or 30 min and nature tone Morning Breeze Mist Forest Light or Rain Smart alarm Duration category describes the length of time the alarm will remain silent between alarm notifications snooze time Smart alarm Tone category provides one of several nature sounds that are used as the alarm tone 10 Tap the Name field and enter a name for this Alarm 11 Tap Save to stor
177. four main function keys that can be used on any screen Home Menu Back and Search Understanding Your Device 29 Home Key The Home key lO takes you back to your Home screen 4 of the 7 available screens p gt Press and hold to launch the Recent apps Task manager screen For more information refer to Accessing Recently Used Applications on page 38 Menu Key The Menu key activates an available menu function for the current screen or application When on the Home screen the following menu options are available e Add adds one of the following functions to a selected screen Widgets Shortcuts Folders and Wallpapers Wallpaper Pi lets you to customize the current screen s wallpaper image by choosing from either Gallery Live Wallpaper or Wallpaper gallery You can obtain images from either your Pictures folder from any of the available images within the device s Wallpaper gallery or from the animated Live Wallpapers Note Wallpapers supports the following image types JPEG PNG GIF BMP and WBMP 30 e Search Q displays the Google Search box that you can use to search for a key term both on the phone and online e Notifications allows you to expand popup notifications area to provide more detailed information about the current on screen notification icons e Edit allows you to add or remove extended screens from your device You can have up to six extended screens one Home
178. from Google s online search engine Use My Location uses your My Location information for Google search results and services Search history determines whether you also wish to included personalized search history results in the list of matches Manage search history helps to manage the personalized search history associated with your current registered Google account Changing Your Settings 239 Searchable items opens a screen where you can choose the search categories included in device searches such as Web Apps Books Contacts Memo Messaging Music Music Player Slacker Voice Search or Yelp e Clear shortcuts erases the history for recently selected search results Language amp Keyboard Settings This setting allows you to configure the language in which to display the menus You can also set on screen keyboard options p gt Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Language and keyboard Language Settings To set the language that the menus display on the phone 1 Press fay gt and then tap Settings gt Language and keyboard gt Select language 2 Select a language and region from the list 240 Select Input Method There are two input methods available Swype and Samsung keypad 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Language and keyboard gt Select input method 2 Select an input method Swype Settings For more information refer to SWYPE Settings
179. from the rest These are intended to point out important information share quick methods for activating features to define terms and more The definitions for these methods are as follows e Notes Presents alternative options for the current feature menu or sub menu e Tips Provides quick or innovative methods or useful shortcuts Important Points out important information about the current feature that could affect performance Warning Brings to your attention important information to prevent loss of data or functionality or even prevent damage to your phone Text Conventions This manual provides condensed information about how to use your phone To make this possible the following text conventions are used to represent often used steps gt Arrows are used to represent the sequence of selecting successive options in longer or repetitive procedures Example From the Home screen press Menu gt Settings gt Wireless and network gt Bluetooth settings Battery Cover The battery SIM card and SD card are installed under the battery cover Important Before removing or replacing the battery cover make sure the phone is switched off To turn the phone off hold down the key until the power off image displays then tap Power off To remove the battery cover 1 Hold the device firmly and locate the cover release latch 2 Place your fingernail in the opening and firmly pop the cover off
180. he SIM Card Note SIM contacts only store the Name and Phone number for an entry Note When storing an entry into your SIM card note that only the Name and Number are saved To save additional information for a particular contact such as notes email dates etc it is important to save that Contact into your phone s onboard memory Contacts 89 1 From the Home screen tap ig Contacts 2 Tap to create a contact Note You can also add a new contact by entering a number from the keypad and pressing and then tap Add to Contacts gt Create contact Continue with step 3 3 Tap a destination type MobileLife Contacts Google Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Phone or SIM depending on where you want to save the new contact information 4 Tap the Given name and Last name fields and enter a name for this contact using the displayed keypad 5 Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact Selections are Gallery or Take photo 6 Tap the label button to the left of the Phone number field to select a category such as Mobile default Home Work Work Fax Home Fax Pager Other Custom or Callback Note These label entries can change and are dependant on the selected destination type ex Callback might not appear with a Google account destination type 7 Tapa phone number field and enter a phone number 90 9 e Tap on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously entered phone number e T
181. he application descriptions Important If the selected application requires access to data or control of a function on your phone Market displays the information the application will access Tap OK if you agree to the conditions of the application Once you tap OK on this screen you are responsible for using this application on the phone and the amount of data it uses Use this feature with caution 4 Tap Install Note Use caution with applications which request access to any personal data functions or significant amounts of data usage times 5 If prompted follow the on screen instructions to pay for the application 6 Check the progress of the current download by opening the Notifications panel 7 After the item is downloaded and installed on your phone the content download icon appears in the notification area of the status bar 8 On the Android Market screen press and then tap My Apps tap the installed application in the list and then tap Open Tip The newly downloaded applications display in the applications list and are shown in alphabetical order if the View Type is set to Alphabetical grid or Alphabetical list or at the end of the list if View type is set to Customizable grid Note A data plan is required to use this feature Charges may apply Please contact your service provider for further details Launching an Installed Google Application 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications 2 Tap t
182. he newly installed application This application is typically located on the last Applications page Applications and Development 165 Android Development This device can be used for Android application development You can write applications in the SDK and install them on this device then run the applications using the hardware system and network Warning Android Dev Phones are not intended for non developer end users Because the device can be configured with system software not provided by or supported by Google or any other company end users operate these devices at their own risk Unknown sources This feature can be used for Android application development The feature allows developers to install non Market applications p gt Press fay gt and then tap sO Settings gt Applications gt Unknown sources Unknown sources displays a check mark to indicate it is active 166 Manage applications This feature allows you to manage and remove installed applications You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the applications on your phone and clear the data cache or defaults p gt Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Applications gt Manage applications Clearing application cache and data 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Applications gt Manage applications 2 Tap an application in which to clear
183. he on screen instructions to update the related application icon and features The application might then be called the Play Store a Media Hub Provides you with a one stop shop for the hottest movie and TV content You can now rent or purchase your favorite content and then watch it from the convenience of anywhere For more information refer to Media Hub on page 140 MobileLife Organizer Organizes your family s calendar family shopping list To Do list and Journal entries in one place For more information refer to MobileLife Organizer on page 168 Memo Creates new text memos This application is found in the Utility application folder For more information refer to Memo on page 167 Messaging Provides access to text and multimedia messaging SMS and MMS For more information refer to Creating and Sending Messages on page 107 More for Me Provides customized offers discounts and deals right to your phone For more information refer to More for Me on page 170 Music Google Music Launches the built in Google Music Player that allows you to play music files that you have both downloaded from Google Music and stored on your microSD card For more information refer to Music Google Music on page 143 Music Player Launches the built in Music Player that allows you to play music files that you have stored on your microSD card You can also create playlists Fo
184. he prompt tap OK to delete or Cancel to exit Deleting multiple messages 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap SS Press and then tap Delete threads Tap each message thread you want to delete A checkmark displays beside each selected message Tap Delete Messages 111 5 At the prompt tap OK to delete or Cancel to end the process Message Search You can search through your messages by using the Message Search feature 1 From the Home screen tap SS 2 Press and then tap Search 3 Use the on screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in which to search then tap i 4 All messages that contain the entered search string display Messaging Settings To configure the settings for text messages multimedia messages Voice mails and Push messages 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Press and then tap Settings The following Messaging settings are available 112 Settings e Font size enables the phone to change the display size for the on screen front Choose from Normal Small or Tiny e Split view enables the phone to display a split view window when the phone is in landscape view Storage settings e Delete old messages deletes old messages when the limit is reached rather than overwriting them e Text message limit allows you to set a limit on how many text messages are allowed in one conversation e Multimedia message limit allows you to set a limit on how many multimedia messages are al
185. i Fi range e Cellular Preferred The cellular network is preferred over a Wi Fi network when making calls 3 Tap OK to save the setting Bluetooth settings The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the characteristics of your device s Bluetooth service including e Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth communication and description e Setting your device s visibility or discoverability for other Bluetooth devices e Displaying your device s Bluetooth address Activating Bluetooth p gt Press ay gt and then tap Settings gt Wireless and network gt Bluetooth settings and tap Bluetooth to turn it on Note Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use Activating the Device Name 1 Press Ol gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network Bluetooth settings gt Device name The assigned device name displays 2 Press to erase the current device name and enter a new name for this device using the keyboard 3 Tap OK to confirm your setting Changing Your Settings 213 Activating Visibility p gt Press cay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt Bluetooth settings gt Visible The device is now activated for discovery other devices for a period of time determined by the value set within the Visible time out menu Note Your device visibility is based on the time set within the Visible time out field 2 minutes 5 minutes 1 ho
186. i cscacd auettee se dieces pape eee ete 184 VOICE SEACH agori eroi ni onions aa teg researc sented 185 VOICE Wall Krseris oean AE DE ANE 185 E AA A A A E T 185 NGI EFFES S SE S ETIE 185 YOUTUBE sereis dpe nues aimata aaa ara ea eaaa 186 PA a E AEA oe sce eo E ee RENE 186 Section 10 Connections sssssssssessssssrensnssnnssensnnseenss 188 WG EE S E T oi nmank eoatenmraned 188 Bluetogthi 2 00 2 aig ine eae waddle Rates a aE n 194 Enable Downloading for Web Applications 197 PC ConnectionS sristi iriri tainei in a deiei aa 198 KiS Alias ise doc nnee na ayes ares a aE eg we eae 199 WEFT a4 n ile ndnicaiieleuculen gute nanan aucaivnor mame 200 USB N xi ie ceeds iw Sakae daaetedoe eta 202 Mobile HotSpot iss s ira rrira te searkcaercreretoncere we ecar arar sree 203 Section 11 Time Management sseseeeeeseeee 206 Calenda ihe fo EA na or a as minore none arera ga deed 206 GLOGS assein ipa T O EE OON T E nies 207 World ClOCK aiaa ada inde tadnees nasaan 209 SOMN edri ta A a a a 209 SONO A TINI asraniaspirard rars riS ENNI ErEEI SY 209 Configuring a Desk Clock ccc cece eee 209 Section 12 Changing Your Settings seseee 210 Wireless and Networks 000s eee eeeae ee 210 USB UNNGS bc tscntecu esse rsuekees eesbosceeeckuan 214 WSBFOHOnNG REE EE 214 UPN a an EEEE E nes 215 CEN SOUE s eraio a a a EE 219 Soud SOTUMGS a ETEA EE 223 Display SUNNE s ssc nacocdeosdeat her aana aAA 225 P
187. icates the feature is enabled Note The process of updating your Contacts tab can take several minutes If after 10 20 minutes your list has not been updated repeat step 2 3 100 5 Your Contacts tab then reflects any updated Contact information Note Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your Gmail and Corporate accounts via the device Display Options The Display options menu allows you to allows you to choose whether to display contacts saved from the Phone SIM T Mobile Contacts Backup external source or all You can also choose to display only contacts that have phone numbers 1 From the Home screen tap Ha 2 Press and then tap More gt Display options Configure any of the following options e Only contacts with phones allows you to display only those contacts containing phone numbers e Sort by defines how the current list of Contacts are sorted Given name or Last name e Display contacts by defines how the current list of Contacts are listed Given name first ex Steve Smith or Last name first Smith Steve e Select contacts to display allows you to filter Contacts based on category entries from within the locations such as MobileLife Contacts Google Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Phone and SIM 3 Tap Done Adding more Contacts via Accounts and Sync When you synchronize applications such as Facebook Linkedin a corporate email account or Google using the Accounts and sync option
188. ice prior to searching for an available network 3 Tap Search now to manually search for a network 218 4 Tap Select automatically to automatically select a network connection Note Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time Default Setup Options Your phone default is set to Automatic to automatically search for an available network You can set this option to Manual to select a network each time you connect 1 Press fa gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network Mobile networks gt Network operators 2 Tap Default setup 3 Tap Automatic to allow the device to automatically select a network sore Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network manually Call Settings To access the Call settings menu p gt Press Al gt and then tap OP Settings gt Call sois From the Home screen tap id gt Settings gt Call Configuring General Call Settings Configure the general call settings using this option 1 From the Home screen tap id gt Settings gt Call 2 Tap one of the following options e Call rejection allows you to manage your rejection mode and rejection list Auto reject mode sets the phone to automatically reject incoming Calls or messages Auto reject list provides access to current rejection entries and numbers Set reject messages allows you to manage both existing rejection messages and create new ones e Call alert allows you to as
189. ices by tapping Emergency call and using the on screen dialer 1 Press and hold WO until the device switches on The device searches for your network and after finding it you can make or receive calls Note The display language is preset to English at the factory To change the language use the Language menu For more information refer to Language amp Keyboard Settings on page 240 2 Press and hold WO until the Phone options screen appears 3 Tap Power Off 0 Locking and Unlocking the Device By default the device screen locks when the backlight turns off p Place your finger on the screen and swipe the glass in any of the directions shown unlock the device 4 056 Wed De SAMSUNG Note You can choose to configure lock settings to prevent unauthorized use of your device For more information refer to Setting up SIM Card Lock on page 230 Getting Started 15 Creating a New Google Account You should create a Google Account when you first use your device in order to fully utilize the functionality This account provides access to several device features such as Gmail Google Maps Google Search and the Android Market applications Before you are able to access Google applications you must enter your account information These applications sync between your device and your online Google account To create a new Google Account from your phone 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap ca
190. ices fields to set the options To change your Bluetooth name 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap Device name 3 Enter anew name 4 Tap OK to complete the rename process To set visibility 1 Verify your Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap Visible Making your device visible allows other devices to pair and communicate Note Your device visibility is based on the time set within the Visible time out field 2 Minutes 5 Minutes 1 Hour or Never This value appears as a countdown within this Visible time out field To scan for Bluetooth devices 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap Scan for devices to search for visible external Bluetooth compatible devices such as headsets devices printers and computers Pairing Bluetooth Devices The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted connections between your device and another Bluetooth device When you pair devices they share a passkey allowing for fast secure connections while bypassing the discovery and authentication process Note Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one time process Once pairing is established the devices continue to recognize their partnership and exchange information without entering a passcode To pair your device with another Bluetooth device 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap Visible Your d
191. ies Samsung or its suppliers own the title copyright and other intellectual property rights in the Software The Software is licensed not sold 3 LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS You may not reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise attempt to discover the source code or algorithms of the Software except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation or modify or disable any features of the Software or create derivative works based on the Software You may not rent lease lend sublicense or provide commercial hosting services with the Software 4 CONSENT TO USE OF DATA You agree that Samsung and its affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as part of the product support services related to the Software provided to you if any related to the Software Samsung may use this information solely to improve its products or to provide customized services or technologies to you and will not disclose this information in a form that personally identifies you 5 UPGRADES This EULA applies to updates supplements and add on components if any of the Software that Samsung may provide to you or make available to you after the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software unless we provide other terms along with such upgrade To use Software identified as an upgrade you must first be licensed for the Software identified by Samsung as el
192. ight not appear with a Google account destination type 7 Tap Save to complete and store the new entry Note For further details about how to enter characters see Text Input Methods on page 77 Finding a Contact You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names onto either your SIM card your phone s built in memory or an external location such as Google Exchange or T Mobile Backup They are all physically separate but are used as a single entity called Contacts Depending on the storage size of the particular SIM card the maximum number of phone numbers the card can store may differ 1 From the Home screen tap B Contacts 2 Swipe up or down until you see the contact displayed or Tap the Search contacts field and begin entering the entry s name Matching entries are then displayed This process filters through all of your current account Contact entries to only show you the matching entries In a single motion touch and hold the letter tab area on the right until on screen letters appear then scroll through the list You are then taken to that section of the Contacts list Tap the contact entry Contacts 91 92 Tabs Create Contact Contacts M N o P Q R p S T u w N lt Search Contacts field Tabbed Navigation Editing Contact Information 1 From the Home screen tap a 2 Tap a contact name from the list 3 Press and select Edit Note You c
193. igible for the upgrade After upgrading you may no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility 6 SOFTWARE TRANSFER You may not transfer this EULA or the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the Software accompanied In such event the transfer must include all of the Software including all component parts the media and printed materials any upgrades this EULA and you may not retain any copies of the Software The transfer may not be an indirect transfer such as a consignment Prior to the transfer the end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA terms 7 EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknowledge that the Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries You agree to Warranty Information 273 comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the Software including the U S Export Administration Regulations as well as end user end use and destination restrictions issued by U S and other governments 8 TERMINATION This EULA is effective until terminated Your rights under this License will terminate automatically without notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this EULA Upon termination of this EULA you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies full or partial of the Software 9 THIRD PARTY APPLICATI
194. ign a short cut number to a phone number in the Contacts List for speed dialing 1 2 From the Home screen tap Touch and hold a speed dial location numbers 2 9 or 1 if you are dialing voice mail until the number begins to dial If you are not certain of the speed dial location tap Ay gt gt Speed dial setting and tap a speed dial number to view the assigned phone number Call Functions and Contacts List 65 Wi Fi Calling Wi Fi Calling is a free feature for T Mobile customers using this device with the new ISIM card Wi Fi Calling is an excellent solution for coverage issues in and around the home or wherever cellular coverage is limited Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes The benefits of Wi Fi Calling include the following e Wi Fi Calling provides a coverage option to improve upon your current in home coverage experience e Wi Fi Calling works anywhere there is an open Wi Fi signal available Important A new ISIM card must be installed within the device prior to using this feature Wi Fi must first be active and communicating prior to launching Wi Fi Calling Activating Wi Fi 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt Wi Fi settings 2 Tap Wi Fi to turn it on A checkmark displays to indicate activation 66 3 Tap an available WAP Wireless Access Point from within the Wi Fi networks area of the page Follow the o
195. il Contacts that contain an email address display 3 Tap the contact s to which you want to send an email A check mark displays next to the selection Note The select contact must have an email as part of their details screen 4 Tap Send 5 Select an email account type 6 Compose the email and tap Send Exportilmport For more information refer to Copying Contact Information on page 99 Contact List Settings From this menu you can determine the default storage location for Contacts display your phone s primary number and view service numbers listed in your Contact list 1 From the Home screen tap a 2 Press and then tap More gt Settings 3 Select one of the following options e Save new contacts to defines the default storage location of new Contacts Choose from Always ask MobileLife Contacts Google Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Phone or SIM e Service numbers displays available T Mobile service numbers e Send contact allows you to define what set of namecards are sent when you choose to send namecards to other sources Read the on screen description of this feature and tap Next Select either Send all namecards or Send individual namecards Contacts 103 Groups This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact to a call group This group can be one of the already present groups Family Friends or Work or a user created group Creating a New Caller Group 1 2
196. ile TMobile out when viewing a picture or a Web page Move fingers inward to Swipe or slide i zoom out 2 and Drag xm Spread Spread the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom in when viewing a picture or a Web page Move fingers outward to Flick Zoom in Pinch Zoom Out Rotate Spread Zoom In e Rotate Automatically change the screen orientation from portrait to landscape by turning the device sideways For example rotate to q 3 i Note These screens can be re arranged in any desired order For more landscape orientation when entering text to provide a larger keyboard information refer to Customizing the Screens on page 47 or when viewing web content to minimize scrolling 36 e Motion Navigation and Activation The phone comes equipped with the ability to assign specific functions to certain phone actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope Note Motion must be enabled for this feature to be active For more information refer to Motion Settings on page 237 Menu Navigation You can tailor the phone s range of functions to fit your needs using both menus and applications Menus sub menus and features are accessed by scrolling through the available on screen menus Your phone defaults with seven home screens Navigating Through the Application Menus There are four default Application Menus available As you add more applications from the Android Marketplace
197. ing e Alert Settings sets when you would receive alerts for the following Minute Usage tracks the number of minutes used and remaining in your plan Minute Usage Reminder sends an alert when the number of minutes used reaches 75 percent of the total available minutes in the plan Over Limit Alert sends an alert when usage exceeds your plan s total available minutes Message Usage tracks the number of messages used and remaining in your plan If you plan includes unlimited messages this setting does not apply Data Usage tracks data used and remaining in your plan If you plan includes unlimited data usage this setting does not apply Payment Reminder alerts when your bill is due Power Saver sends an alert when the battery level reaches 30 percent The alert displays in the notification window This alert is automatically set to On Support Alerts activates deactivates automated troubleshooting 172 Recent Oder Status Displays details about your recent orders e Account Events provides details about your recent account events Billing This provides a billing summary Plan This screen displays specific information and charges for your current plan and services The screen also displays additional services information and charges Included categories include My plan amp services Additional Services and T Mobile Offers My Device Use the My Device application to configure device setti
198. ing displays parking information relative to your current location e Gas Stations displays gas station location relative to your current location e ATMs amp Banks displays ATM and Bank locations relative to your current location e Restaurants displays restaurant and eatery locations relative to your current location Press gf to access additional options e Search manually search for a destination address place name of business or even a type of business e Set Destination returns you to the navigation options screen where you can access a destination by either Speaking Typing or selecting from a Contacts entry or Starred Place e Layers allows you to switch map views See previous description e Mute allows you to mute the audio readout and directional information e Exit Navigation terminates the application More provides additional application information such as Help and Terms Privacy amp Notices Caution Navigation is a beta product Use caution Netflix Netflix is a service offering online streaming service that allows you to watch TV Shows amp Movies directly on your phone 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Netflix If prompted to update follow the on screen prompts 2 Enter the Email and Password associated with your current Netflix account 3 Follow the on screen prompts to use the application Note It is recommended that this service be used in conjunction with an
199. ing the entry Select this Hotspot and follow your on screen instructions to complete the connection Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an Internet connection To secure the Mobile HotSpot service The two most common methods for securing your connection to the Hotspot are to a security method WPA2 PSK and to Hide your phone s SSID name 1 Press al gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt USB tethering and Mobile HotSpot gt Mobile HotSpot settings gt Configure Mobile HotSpot Tap the Security field and select WPA2 PSK 3 With security enabled enter a new password into the Password field Important The more complex the password the harder it will be for intruders to break your security It is recommended that you not use names birthdays or other personal information 4 Tap Save to store the new settings Connections 205 Section 11 Time Management This section describes how you can manage time using time related applications such as the Calendar Alarm Clock Analog or Digital clock and the World clock Calendar With the Calendar feature you can consult the calendar by day week or month create events and set an alarm to act as a reminder 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt j Calendar The Calendar displays four tabs Month displays the Month view e Week displays the Week view e Day displays the Day view e List allows you t
200. ing this feature you can use the phone as a calculator The calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions addition subtraction multiplication and division You can also use this as a scientific calculator 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt I Calculator 2 Enter the first number using the numeric keys 3 Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the Plus Minus Multiplication or Division key 4 Enter the next number 5 To view the result tap the equals key 6 Repeat steps 1 to 4 as many times as required Note Place the screen in Landscape mode to reveal additional scientific functions 156 Calendar With the Calendar feature you can consult the calendar by day week or month create events and set an alarm to act as a reminder Google Calendar is built into the phone and synchronizes both new and existing entries between your phone and your online Google account Important You must have previously added an account Facebook Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or Google prior to using the Calendar 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt Calendar The Calendar displays four tabs e Month displays the Month view e Week displays the Week view e Day displays the Day view e List allows you to search for events for the selected Month Week or Day or you can look for events for a future date 2 Press and select one of the following options e C
201. initialized over a cellular network before it can be used During this initial registration process any current Wi Fi connections must be disabled 3 Tap Disable Wi Fi if you currently have an active Wi Fi connection Multimedia 151 Tap Start Trial to begin a free 30 day trial of the service or Tap Continue to keep viewing the free content or Purchase Options to buy the paid features Tap any of the following categories to begin viewing Live TV On Demand My Media More Info Browse or Live Channels YouTube YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload and share videos and view them in MPEG 4 format 1 152 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt YouTube When the screen loads you can begin searching and viewing posted videos Press gt Settings gt High quality on mobile if you prefer high quality output Section 9 Applications and Development This section outlines the various applications that are available on your phone Applications The Applications list provides quick access to all the available applications on the phone Refer to the application table on page 38 for a description of each Application its function and how to navigate through that particular application If the application is already described in another section of this user manual then a cross reference to that particular section is provided 411 amp More Provides more than just single tap acc
202. input field To use the Samsung keypad you must first configure the settings to default to the Samsung keypad 1 Press ay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Language and keyboard gt Select input method gt Samsung keypad From a screen where you can enter text tap and hold the text input field and tap Input method gt Samsung keypad Input Mode Settings Current Mode Delete Indicator 2 The virtual keyboard is then assigned to the Samsung keypad configuration for all subsequent text input Entering Text 83 Changing the Text Input Mode in Keypad 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard 2 With Samsung keypad as your text entry method select one of the following text mode options e Abc to use alphabetic characters from the on screen keyboard In this mode the text mode button displays 2123 e Symbol Numeric to enter numbers by pressing the numbers selecting them on the on screen keyboard In this mode the text mode button displays aech There are up to 3 available pages of numeric symbols available by tapping u Note After typing an initial uppercase character tap to toggle capitalization All lowercase t Displays when the next character is entered in lowercase 84 Initial Uppercase Displays when the first character of each word is entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters are lowercase All Uppercase t Displays when al
203. ion refer to Kies Air on page 199 Latitude Google Latitude allows you and your friends share locations and status messages with each other It also lets you send instant messages and emails make phone calls and get directions to your friends locations Important You must sign in to your Google account enable Wi Fi and enable the Location feature before you can use this application For more information refer to Wi Fi settings on page 210 Note Although you do not have to enable location services in order to use Latitude it is recommended for best accuracy Applications and Development 159 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt 8 Latitude Important For best results it is recommended that you enable all of your location services For more information refer to Location and Security on page 228 2 Tap Share location with family or friends to share your 160 location and launch the Friends screen Tap Wi Fi Disabled Click to enable connection to navigate to the Wi Fi Settings menu where you can turn on Wi Fi if it is not already enabled For more information refer to Wi Fi on page 200 If prompted with the Improve My Location screen tap Settings to configure the necessary settings or Skip to continue on without making a change Sharing your Location with Friends 1 From the Latitude map screen tap to display your Latitude friends At first only your name
204. ion feature is enabled Type Destination allows you to manually enter a destination address via the on screen keypad e Contacts allows you to receive tumn by tum directions to the address stored for a selected Contacts entry by using sensors Hran e Starred Places allows you to obtain directions to locations that Navigation options have been starred within Google maps maps google com 1 From the Home screen tap cd gt Navigation Navigation Map options The navigation application can be configured from the Once on the map screen you can access the following features e Destination returns you to the previous Navigation options screen e Search by voice Speak your destination instead of typing e Layers allows you to switch map views e Traffic view available only in selected areas Real time traffic conditions are displayed over roads as color coded lines Each color represents how fast the traffic is moving the GPS location feature has been enhanced by using Wi Fi and or mobile networks to increase accuracy 4 Tap Use sensor aiding A green check mark indicates the phone is enhancing its positioning ability and save power main screen 2 Read the on screen disclaimer and tap Accept 174 e Satellite Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth Satellite images are not real time Google Earth acquires the best imagery available most of which is approximately one to three years old e Park
205. ion requirements imposed by your country of residence or any other country in which you use the Service Samsung may restrict access to any part of the Service or terminate your access to the Service at any time in its sole Warranty Information 279 discretion if required by law or by the relevant authorities or regulatory agencies to do so Third Party Sites and Content The Service may allow access to sites on the Internet that are owned or operated by third parties Access to such sites does not imply that Samsung endorses the site or the conduct products or services on the site Upon accessing any such site you must review and agree to the rules of use of the relevant site before using the site You acknowledge and agree that Samsung has no control over the content products or services of third party sites and does not assume any responsibility for or in respect of such content products or services Third party content and services may be terminated or interrupted at any time and Samsung makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any period of time Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any interruption or suspension of any third party content or service In addition Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to third party sites Any question or request for service relating to third party sites should be made directly to the rele
206. ions or All animations e Screen timeout adjusts the delay time before the screen automatically turns off Selections are 15 seconds 30 seconds 1 minute 2 minutes and 10 minutes e Touch key light duration to adjust the light duration of the touch keys Selections are 1 5 seconds 6 seconds Always off and Always on e Auto adjust screen power adjusts the phone s LCD brightness level to automatically adjust and conserve battery power 226 Adjusting Screen Brightness This feature configures the LCD Brightness levels 1 Press fay gt and then tap sO Settings gt Display gt Brightness Tap Automatic brightness to allow the phone to self adjust and tap OK or Touch and slide the on screen slider to adjust the level and tap OK Power Saving Mode This feature allows you both automatically set the phone to use a power saving mode and configure additional power saving options manually all in an effort to conserve battery power 1 Press Al gt and then tap Ke Settings gt Power saving mode Confirm appears at the top of the screen This indicates the power saving mode is active To automatically enable power saving options 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Power saving mode Tap Use Power saving mode to enable this feature when the battery level is low Tap Power saving on at to assign the battery low level at which the power saving mode is activated I
207. ions in atoms and molecules It can permanently damage biological tissues including DNA the genetic material The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy including both radio waves and microwaves are not great enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules Therefore RF energy is a type of non ionizing radiation Other types of non ionizing radiation include visible light infrared radiation heat and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies While RF energy does not ionize particles large amounts can increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage Two areas of the body the eyes and the testes are particularly vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood flow in them to carry away excess heat Research Results to Date Is there a connection between RF and certain health problems The results of most studies conducted to date say no In addition attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have shown a connection have failed The scientific community at large therefore believes that the weight of scientific evidence does not show an association between exposure to Radio Frequency RF from cell phones and adverse health outcomes Still the scientific community has supported additional research to address gaps in knowledge Some of these studies are described below Interphone Study Interphone is a large international study designed to determine
208. iquids can get into the phone s circuits leading to corrosion Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate normally the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard If the phone and or battery get wet have them checked by your service provider or contact Samsung even if they appear to be working properly Health and Safety Information 255 e Do not place your battery in or near a heat source Excessive heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the phone or the battery to explode Do not dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven hair dryer iron or radiator Avoid leaving your phone in your car in high temperatures e Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire The phone or the battery may explode when overheated e Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery Do not let leaking battery fluid come in contact with your eyes skin or clothing For safe disposal options contact your nearest Samsung authorized service center Avoid dropping the cell phone Dropping the phone or the battery especially on a hard surface can potentially cause damage to the phone and battery If you suspect damage to the phone or battery take it to a service center for inspection Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way e Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects Accidental short circuiting can occur when a metallic object coin key
209. irect Or call 877 278 0799 these locations for no fee Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or batteries at many retail or carrier provided locations where mobile devices and batteries are sold Additional information regarding specific locations may be found at http Avww epa gov epawaste partnerships plugin cellphone index htm or at http Awww call2recycle org Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile devices and batteries Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance with local regulations In some areas the disposal of these items in household or business trash may be prohibited Help us protect the environment recycle Warning Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may explode Health and Safety Information 257 UL Certified Travel Charger WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL safety requirements Please adhere to the following safety instructions per UL guidelines The display on your mobile device is made of glass or acrylic and could break if your mobile device is dropped or FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE PROPERTY DAMAGE if it receives significant impact Do not use if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause injury to you WARRANTY DISCLAIMER PROPER USE OF A TOUCH SCREEN IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE MOBILE DEV
210. is displayed Press gt Add friends Tap Select from Contacts or Add via email address Tap a contact or enter an email address then tap Add friends Tap Yes at the Send sharing requests prompt Your friend will receive an email or text message with your location marked on a map They will also receive instructions on how to view your location from the web or use Latitude on their phone or tablet provided it is available Once they acknowledge your request their location will display on your tablet They can share their location from their computer phone or tablet For more information go to http Avww google com latitude To view the map press Ea gt Map view Latitude Options gt From the map display press to display the following options e Search allows you to search for a place of interest e Directions displays navigation directions to a location from a starting point e Clear Map allows you to remove all markings and layers from the map More provides access to additional features such as Map Places Navigation Latitude Location history and My Places e Settings allows you to select the following additional options Cache Settings allows you to set options to pre fetch map tiles when not using Wi Fi and to clear the cache that holds the map tiles Location reporting allows you to configure the location reporting parameters Labs this is a testing ground for experimenta
211. ises all content and services accessible through Social Hub including third party content and services and if applicable the website where you accessed these Terms collectively the Service The Terms constitute an agreement between you and Samsung Electronics Co Ltd and its affiliates collectively Samsung with respect to the Service By using the Service you agree to be legally bound to the Terms You are not allowed to use the Service if you do not agree to the Terms To the extent permitted by applicable law Samsung reserves the right to modify update supplement revise or otherwise change the Terms and to impose new or additional rules policies terms or conditions in relation to the Service from time to time with or without notice to you Amendments Samsung may provide you with notice of the Amendments by sending an email message to the email address listed in your account information if any or by posting the notice on the Social Hub website Such Amendments will be effective immediately and incorporated into the Terms upon sending or posting of such Warranty Information 277 notice You are responsible for regularly reviewing the Terms Your continued use of the Service will be deemed to constitute your acceptance of any and all such Amendments Eligibility To use the Service you must be at least sixteen 16 years of age If you are at least sixteen 16 years of age but are a minor for legal purposes where y
212. isplays these folders as separate albums The top left album contains all the pictures in the storage card Multimedia 137 Using the Video Player The Video Player application plays video files stored on the SD card This device is able to playback DivX videos 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt Utility gt oa Videos A list of videos sorted on the SD card displays in the Video list 2 Tapa video file to begin viewing DivX Overview This device is able to playback DivX videos DivX Certified to play Divx video up to HD 720p including premium content If you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for your device the message Authorization Error will be displayed and your content will not play Learn more at www divx com vod Your device must first be registered to playback protected or purchased DivX content DRM free or unprotected content does not required DivX VOD registration Locating Your VOD Registration Number 1 Press ay gt and then tap Settings gt About phone gt Legal information gt License settings gt DivX VOD gt Register 138 2 Write down your Registration code 3 Tap OK Register Your DivX Device for VOD Playback of Purchased Movies To play purchased DivX movies on your device you will first need to complete a one time registration using both your device and your computer 1 Write down the DivX registration code that appears on screen Copy
213. issing phone and if desired tap New user to setup a new account or Existing user to log into your account field to activate the feature 8 Tap Start Lookout From the main application the main features are presented as buttons Tap one to reveal a button that will run the feature Maps Google Maps allow you to track your current location view real time traffic issues and view detailed destination directions There is also a search tool included to help you locate places of interest or a specific address You can view locations on a vector or aerial map or you can view locations at the street level Important Before using Google Maps you must have an active data 3G 4G or Wi Fi connection The Maps application does not cover every country or city p gt From the Home screen tap Applications gt W Maps Important For best results it is recommended that you enable all of your location services For more information refer to Location and Security on page 228 162 Enabling a Location source Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest you must enable a location source To enable the location source you must enable the wireless network or enable the GPS satellites Important The more location determining functions are enabled the more accurate the determination will be of your position 1 Press Ol gt and then tap Settings gt Location and security
214. itondes 176 DOWRHDAIS s vais renan peresen anni krer EEE SiE 158 PHO ECHO sccascisiticncsdsanghemmniane re ari o ees 176 Emal seere e ese deee ec je teint anaes 158 PACS o aeann ssh dice ahaa e nit i 177 PUGS see fd arpene oe ott cth carne atatinensss7s cine ntenntae 158 Polaris OfICE is abse disaient eed paa te 177 elle a eee 158 FIO ADDS ines sweeneeneeeaceeeeserauerarexe heres 178 Game Base drre es neh hey bes aes eee ee ee 158 SCUINS cisctdeeeiessedseeeeeteedeseases eeanks 178 Gog Mall i ia seinaga aae E 159 SIACKEl oconnori ia ea n S 178 Google Search 0 cece ccc cece cence 159 SOCUMUD 25 225 nage toe cueee he eceer sender aed 179 MCSA aerar eek ome ae awa Rada AEA 159 T Mobile Mall cccccaccsacnsaxesacenanss duende sou 179 LANIUDE sive peeved ead PEENE E AES EEEE 159 T Mobile Name ID ss sses iii esnai Os ta ia i 180 Lookout Security 00 0 c cece eee e eee eee 161 TMobile TV is cuca pena nara aenr EEE Re be 180 RDS cht alt aiaa ein da r a R A a e a A 162 T Mobile Video Chat eccerre niga cece a a 180 NETI C E EE TEE 164 VO08 sexeseadnceeeeeeees oes niie cased 181 TaSk MAnagen ww d scscicacscarsca A auctbes aarti ded aerate 182 TeleNav GPS Navigator 0 0 cece eee eee 183 UHN o oeiia wh ark be warmth nna he ace nce RA 183 VIGGOS inira Petseccgacttangcacd anhverteargee Sepreceatanpe cite ered 184 Visual Voicemail 2 idewniwetdracdas ator adecconasass 184 VOICE Command sosmesa ai 184 Voice Rec rd f orra
215. jewelry Clip or pen causes a direct connection between the and terminals of the battery metal strips on the battery for example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag Short circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the object causing the short circuiting 256 Important Use only Samsung approved batteries and recharge your battery only with Samsung approved chargers which are specifically designed for your phone WARNING Use of a non Samsung approved battery or charger may present a risk of fire explosion leakage or other hazard Samsung s warranty does not cover damage to the phone caused by non Samsung approved batteries and or chargers e Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers Some websites and second hand dealers not associated with reputable manufacturers and carriers might be selling incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers Consumers should purchase manufacturer or carrier recommended products and accessories If unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger Misuse or use of incompatible phones batteries and charging devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible risk of fire explosion or leakage leading to serious injuries damages to your phone or other serious hazard Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its
216. l assistance provide e mail services or facilitate our online services In those instances we may need to share your personal information with them We require these companies to use your personal information only to provide the particular product or service and do not authorize them to use your personal information for any other reason We sometimes offer promotions in conjunction with a third party sponsor If you choose to participate in those promotions we may share your information with the sponsor if they need it to send you a product or other special promotion they offer Third Party Advertisers We may use third party advertising companies to deliver specific advertisements to you These companies may collect non personal information about your visits to Social Hub in order to provide advertisements about products and services that may be of interest to you 286 These companies may also aggregate your non personal information for use in targeted advertising marketing research and other similar purposes These companies may place their own cookies on your computer If you want to prevent a third party advertiser from collecting and using this information you may visit each third party advertiser s website directly and opt out Other Disclosures We may disclose personal information when we are required or requested to do so by law court order or other government or law enforcement authority or regulatory agency to enf
217. l characters will be entered as uppercase characters By default the first letter of a new entry is capitalized and the following letters are lowercased After a character is entered the cursor automatically advances to the next space Using ABC Mode in Samsung Keypad 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard 2 Tap E to configure the keyboard for ABC mode Once in this mode the text input type shows p13 Note After typing an initial uppercase character the it key changes to and all letters that follow are in lower case 3 Enter your text using the on screen keyboard If you make a mistake tap to erase a single character Touch and hold to erase an entire word 4 Tap Send to send the message Using Symbol Numeric Mode Use the Symbol Numeric Mode to add numbers symbols or emoticons While in this mode the text mode key displays jasc 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard Rotate the phone counterclockwise to a landscape orientation if desired 2 Tap to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode Once in this mode the text input type shows EES 3 Tap a number symbol or emoticon character 4 Tap Efe to return to ABC mode To enter symbols 1 Tap to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode 2 Tap the appropriate symbol key r Tap button to cycle through additional pag
218. l currently displayed Contact entries 4 Tap Send and select a delivery method Bluetooth to transmit this contact to another bluetooth compatible device e Email to attach the contact card to a new outgoing email Exchange or Internet e Gmail to attach the contact card to a new outgoing Internet based email e Messaging to attach the contact card to a new outgoing text message Sending a namecard using Bluetooth You must create a Contact prior to sending a namecard to a recipient For more information refer to Creating a Contact on page 89 1 From the Home screen tap g 2 Touch and hold the entry to reveal the on screen context menu 3 Tap Send namecard via gt Bluetooth Important You must activate Bluetooth to use this feature 4 Tap the Bluetooth device in which to send this name card Bluetooth forwards the namecard to the recipient Copying Contact Information Copying Contact Information to the SIM Card The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts list is your phone s built in memory This procedure allows you to copy numbers saved to the phone s memory onto the SIM card 1 2 From the Home screen tap a From the Contacts List press and then tap More gt Import Export gt Export to SIM card Tap Select all to choose all current phone contact entries or Select a specific entry by touching an entry A check mark indicates a selection Tap Ex
219. l features that aren t ready for primetime They may change break or disappear at any time Click on a Lab to enable or disable it Terms Privacy amp Notices displays the Terms and Conditions Privacy Policy o r Legal Notices information Select the desired information from the pop up menu About displays general information about Google maps such as Version Platform Locale Total data sent Total data received Free memory etc e Help displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you can receive help on Google Maps Lookout Security Lookout provides mobile device specific security features that are coupled with a minimal performance hit Lookout Mobile Security provides key security options that are unique to the mobile market Along with the antivirus and anti malware tech there s a lost and stolen phone locator service an application privacy adviser and a backup service 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt S Lookout Security 2 Read the on screen descriptions and tap Get started to begin your configuration 3 Read the on screen information about Security and if desired tap the Enable Security field to activate the feature 4 Tap Next 5 Read the on screen information about Backup and if desired tap the Enable Backup field to activate the feature 6 Tap Next Applications and Development 161 7 Read the on screen information about the feature that can help locate your m
220. lapping cycling trails on your map Wikipedia displays any Wikipedia markers and info on your map My Location when touched the location displays on the map with a blinking blue dot Press and select one of the following options Search allows you to search for a place of interest e Directions displays navigation directions to a location from a starting point e Clear Map after viewing or following directions this option resets the map More provides access to additional features such as Map Places Navigation Latitude Location history and My Places e Settings allows you to select the following additional options Cache Settings allows you to set options to pre fetch map tiles when not using Wi Fi and to clear the cache that holds the map tiles Location reporting allows you to configure the location reporting parameters Labs this is a testing ground for experimental features that aren t ready for primetime They may change break or disappear at any time Click ona Lab to enable or disable it Terms Privacy amp Notices displays the Terms and Conditions Privacy Policy or Legal Notices information Select the desired information from the pop up menu About displays general information about Google maps such as Version Platform Locale Total data sent Total data received Free memory etc e Help displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you can receive help on Google Ma
221. lf recording which activates the front facing camera so you can video yourself Flash allows you to setthe flash options to Off or On When you setthe flash to On it stays on continually while you are taking a video Settings Edit shortcuts allows you to set shortcut icons for the settings that you use the most Flash allows you to setthe flash options to Off or On When you setthe flash to On it stays on continually while you are taking a video Multimedia 133 134 Settings continued Recording mode allows you to set the recording mode to e Normal is limited only by available space on the destination location e Limit MMS is limited by MMS size restrictions e Self recording activates the front facing camera so you can video yourself Exposure value allows you to adjust the brightness level by moving the slider Timer allows you to set a timer for how long to wait before taking a video Options include Off 2 sec 5 sec and 10 sec Effects allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects to the photo Options include None Negative Black and white and Sepia Resolution allows you to set the image size to either 1280x720 720x480 640x480 320x240 or 176x144 o White balance allows you to set this option to one of the following choices Auto Daylight Cloudy Incandescent or Fluorescent Video quality allows you to set the image quality to Superfine Fine or Normal
222. lication info page Once the application has been moved to the microSD card this button now reads Move to phone Changing Your Settings 233 Running Services The Running services option allows you to view and control currently running services such as Backup Google Talk SNS messaging Swype and more fay gt and then tap Settings gt Applications gt Running services 1 Press The screen displays all the processes that are running 2 Tapa process to stop the process from running When you stop the process the service or application will no longer run until you start the process or application again Important Stopping a process might have undesirable consequences on the application 234 Storage Usage This option allows you to view a list of the memory usage for currently active applications 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Applications gt Storage usage The All tab is opened and displays a list of the current applications 2 Press and then tap Sort by name size to change the list from being sorted either alphabetically or by largest memory usage Battery Usage This option allows you to view a list of those components using battery power 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Applications gt Battery usage 2 Press and then tap Refresh to update the list or Tap an entry to view more detailed information Android Development p gt Press
223. lization automatically capitalizes the first letter of a sentence e Show complete trace once enabled sets wether or not to display the complete Swype path Word suggestion suggests words as you are typing Speed vs accuracy sets how quickly Swype responds to on screen input Move the slider between Fast Response speed or Error Tolerant accuracy and tap OK e Reset Swype s dictionary once enabled deletes any words you have added to Swype s dictionary Locate the About section to review the Swype application information e Version lists the Swype version number Tap Language Options to activate and select the current text input language Default language is US English Swype Text Entry Tips You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video or tutorial on using Swype You can also use the following Swype text entry tips e Create a squiggle like an S shape to create a double letter such as pp in apple e Touch and hold a key to view IIIT the punctuation menu then qwertyuiop make a selection Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter contractions e Double touch on the word you want to change to correct a misspelled word then touch the delete key to erase one character Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word agdfghjki Tzxcvbam e N El toe Entering Text 79 Selecting a Text Input Mode in Swype 1 From a screen where you can e nter
224. ller ID information T Mobile TV Allows you to watch live mobile TV on your phone This application is a subscription service For more information refer to T Mobile TV on page 180 fai T Mobile Video Chat Allows you to record and share live videos on your device with your friends family and your favorite social networks For more information refer to T Mobile Video Chat on page 180 Tags This application is used for organizing and sharing Near Field Communication NFC tags You can scan a tag by turning on your device and placing it near the tag For more information refer to Tags on page 181 Talk Launches a Web based Google Talk application that lets you chat with family and friends over the Internet for free For more information refer to Google Talk on page 125 Q sow On Task Allows you to keep track of both your current and upcoming tasks This application is found in the Utility application folder You can also sync these tasks with different accounts For more information refer to Task on page 182 Task manager Use Task manager to see which applications are running on your phone and to end running applications to extend battery life For more information refer to Task Manager on page 182 TeleNav GPS Navigatior This driving aid provides both audible and visual navigation instructions for GPS navigation For more information refer to TeleNav
225. locks it from its location on the current screen 2 Drag the folder over the Remove tab i and release it Managing Wallpapers Wallpapers consist of either Gallery images user taken Live wallpapers animated backgrounds or Wallpaper gallery default phone wallpapers Note Selecting animated Live wallpapers will require additional battery power To change the current wallpaper 1 Press fay to go to the Home screen 2 Touch and hold an empty area of the screen 3 From the Add to Home window tap Wallpapers 4 Select a Wallpaper e Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera image gallery crop the image and tap Save e Tap Live wallpapers to select from a list of animated backgrounds once done tap Set wallpaper 52 Tap Wallpaper gallery scroll through the images tap a wallpaper image then tap Set wallpaper Section 3 Memory Card Your device lets you use a microSD SD or microSDHC card also referred to as a memory card to expand available memory space This secure digital card enables you to exchange images music and data between SD compatible devices This section addresses the features and options of your device s SD functionality The device has a USB SD card mode microSD card storage up to 4GB in size microSDHC card storage up to 32GB in size Using the SD Card There are several methods for using the SD card 1 Connecting to your PC to store files such
226. lowed in one conversation Text message SMS settings e Delivery reports when this option is activated the network informs you whether or not your message was delivered e Manage SIM card messages allows you to manage the messages stored on the SIM card e Message center allows you to enter the number of your message center where your messages reside while the system is attempting to deliver them e Input mode allows you to set the input mode for your text messages Choose from GSM Alphabet Unicode or Automatic Multimedia message MMS settings Delivery reports when this option is activated the network informs you whether or not your message was delivered e Read reports when this option is activated your phone receives a request for a read reply along with your message to the recipient e Auto retrieve allows the message system to automatically retrieve messages Roaming auto retrieve allows the message system to automatically retrieve while roaming e Creation mode allows you to select the creation mode Free Restricted or Warning Restricted you can only create and submit messages with content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain Warning the phone will wam you via pop up messages that you are Creating a multimedia message which does not fit the Core MM Content Domain Free you may add any content to the message Push message settings Push message allows you to receive push mes
227. lso see the caller s phone number if available Touch and drag upward to reject Touch and slide with a message in any direction to answer the call Touch and slide in any direction to reject the call Call Functions and Contacts List 59 Managing Reject Calls This feature allows you to categorize both known and unknown callers as rejected contacts These Contacts are then added to you Rejection list which can be managed for individual entries from within the Contacts list or as a whole from the Call rejection screen 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Call gt Call rejection 2 Tap Auto reject mode to configure your automatic rejection settings Rejected calls are routed automatically to your voicemail Choose from Off disables the automatic rejection feature You must then manually reject incoming phone calls All numbers enables the features for all known and unknown numbers including those contacts that are not assigned to the rejection list e Auto reject numbers automatically rejects all entries assigned to the Reject list Blacklist 60 Adding numbers to the rejection list Entries can be added to the list via either the Contacts menu or via the Auto reject list menu The Contacts menu option assigns all numbers for an individual as rejected The Auto reject list allows to assign individual numbers To assign multiple numbers as rejected via Contacts 1 From the
228. mail Inbox press and then tap Compose 3 Enter the recipients Email address in the To field Tip Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a comma 4 Press and select Add Cc Bec to add a carbon or blind copy Messages 123 7 Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field Tap the Compose Mail field and begin composing your message Once complete tap 5 Send Viewing a Gmail Message 1 124 From the Gmail Inbox tap a message to view the following options e Archive archives the selected Email e Delete deletes the Email e lt displays older Emails gt displays newer Emails Press to select one of the following additional options Change labels changes the label on the email or conversation e Mark unread unread messages or threads with unread messages display in boldface text in the Inbox e Go to inbox displays the Google Mail Inbox e Mute mutes the conversation e Add Remove star click a message s star to add or remove the star ust like clicking flags in Outlook e More Report spam reports the Email message as spam Settings allows you to configure the General or Notification settings Help launches the browser and displays Google Mobile Help information Select text allows you to select text to copy and paste Creating an Additional Gmail Account 1 2 From the Home screen tap td gt M Gmail If you already have other email ac
229. me you turn on the phone the Insert SIM card to make calls message displays and an animated tutorial shows you how to install the SIM card Without a SIM card you can only make an emergency call with the phone normal cell phone service is not available Call Functions and Contacts List 57 Making an Emergency Call Without a SIM card installed 1 Tap Emergency call from the on screen display to make an emergency call Enter 9 1 1 and tap EJ Complete your call During this type of call you will have access to the Speaker mode Keypad and End Call features Note Selecting Location consent may drain battery power For more 3 information refer to Power Saving Mode on page 226 Tap fa to exit this calling mode call Making an Emergency Call With a SIM card installed 1 2 3 58 Swipe the Lock screen and access the Home screen Press fay and then tap Po Enter the emergency number ex 911 and then tap Complete your call During this type of call you will have access to the Speaker mode Keypad and End Call features Tap to exit this calling mode You may be prompted to exit your emergency call mode Dialing Options When you enter numbers on the Keypad you will see three on screen options From the keypad screen use one of the following options e Call to call the entered number e Delete gy to delete digits from the current number e Voice Mail c0 to access your Voice Mail ser
230. mmitted to protecting the online privacy of visitors users and customers to Warranty Information 283 our Social Hub service This privacy policy Privacy Policy forms part of the Terms which govern your use of Social Hub excluding any third party content and services and if applicable the website where you accessed this Privacy Policy collectively the Service The purpose of the Privacy Policy is to inform you about the types of information we gather about you when you access or use the Service how we may use that information and if and how we disclose it to third parties All users of the Service are required to provide true current complete and accurate personal information when prompted and we will reject and delete any entry that we believe in good faith to be incorrect false falsified or fraudulent or inconsistent with or in violation of the Privacy Policy We will provide you with an opportunity to give your consent in relation to your use of the Service Separate from such consent your access or use of the Service will be construed as your acceptance of the Privacy Policy and of our collection use disclosure management and storage of your personal information as described below We may from time to time transfer or merge any personal information collected off line to our online databases or store off line information in an electronic format We may also combine personal information we collect online with info
231. more screens are created to house these new apps 1 Press fay and then tap we Applications The first Application Menu displays e To close the Applications screen tap A or press Fay 2 Sweep the screen to access the other menus 3 Tap any of the on screen icons to launch the associated application Using Sub Menus Sub menus are available from within most screen and applications 1 Press i A sub menu displays at the bottom of the phone screen 2 Tap an option Sub Menu items Understanding Your Device 37 Using Context Menus Context menus also called pop up menus contain options that apply to a specific item on the screen They function similarly to menu options that appear when you right click your mouse on your desktop computer p Touch and hold an item on screen to open its context menu Edit Del sis Context toin contact Menu Send contact information Remove from favorites Add to group 38 Accessing Recently Used Applications 1 Press and hold to open the recently used applications window Note This recent applications screen also provides access to the Task manager 2 A pop up displays the six most recently used applications 3 Tap an icon to open the recent application Applications The Application menu provides quick access to the most frequently used applications Applications display on each of the four panels on the Applications screens The following table cont
232. n Market Read the introduction and tap Next gt Create to begin Follow the on screen instructions to create a Google Account or If this is not the first time you are starting the phone tap i gt i Gmail Note If you already have a Google account you only need to sign in To create a new Google Account from the Web 1 16 From a computer launch a Web browser and navigate to www google com On the main page click Sign in gt Create an account now Follow the on screen prompts to create your free account Look for an email from Google in the email box you provided and respond to the email to confirm and activate your new account Signing into Your Google Account 1 Launch an application that requires a Google account such as Android Market or Gmail Click Next gt Sign in Tap the Username and Password fields and enter your information Tap Sign in Your device communicates with the Google servers to confirm your information If prompted create a new Gmail username by entering a prefix for your gmail com email address Retrieving your Google Account Password A Google account password is required for Google applications If you misplace or forget your Google Account password follow these instructions to retrieve it 1 From your computer use an Internet browser and navigate to http qoogle com accounts 2 Click on the Can t access your account link 3 Enter your full Gmail addres
233. n allows you to play music files that you have stored on your microSD card You can also create playlists p From the Home screen tap kd Applications gt Music Player For more information refer to Music Player on page 147 My Account This option provides you with account specific information such as your current activity billing information and Plan Services information You can also set alerts for minute or message usage payment reminder or power saver Note You may be prompted to log into the Android Market to receive the latest version of the T Mobile My Account application The differences between My Account and My Device are these My Account check Activity set Alerts and Events review Billing and review your current Plan and services e My Device Support Quick Tools Personalize settings and Storage amp Battery Tip Use the Menu key to toggle between My Account and My Device 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt amp My Account 2 Read the on screen information and tap OK The initial screen displays four tabs Activity Set Alerts Billing and Plan Applications and Development 171 Activity The Activity tab displays your current minute and message activity You can view what percentage of minutes were used as well as the number of messages used for a particular start date Alerts and Events From this screen you can activate alerts to notify you of the follow
234. n connection 3 Press the WPS button on your Wi Fi access point within 2 minutes Manually Adding a Wi Fi Network 1 Press cay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt Wi Fi settings 2 Tap Wi Fi to turn it on 3 Tap Add Wi Fi network 4 Enter the SSID Service Set Identifier and Security settings then tap Save Note An SSID is a unique key which identifies a wireless LAN Its purpose is to stop other wireless equipment from accessing your LAN whether accidentally or intentionally To communicate wireless devices must be configured with the same SSID Changing Your Settings 211 Wi Fi Direct Settings You can configure your device to connect directly with other Wi Fi capable devices This is an easy way to transfer data between devices These devices must be enabled for Wi Fi direct communication This connection is direct and not via a hotspot or WAP Note Activating this feature will disconnect your current Wi Fi network connection 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt Wi Fi Direct settings 2 Tap Wi Fi Direct A check mark displayed next to the feature indicating it is enabled Your phone will begin to search for other devices enabled with Wi Fi direct connections 3 After scan tap a device name to begin the connection process to another Wi Fi Direct compatible device Note The target device must also have Wi Fi Direct service active and ru
235. n event 206 Manually Sync Events 157 Settings 206 Call Answering Ending 244 Call Alert 219 Call Answering Ending 219 Call Barring 221 Call Duration Viewing 76 Call Forwarding 219 Configuring 220 Call Functions 56 Answering 59 Ending 57 Ending a Call 57 Ending via Status Bar 57 Making a Multi Party Call 71 Pause Dialing 63 Redialing the last number 64 Wait dialing 63 Call Rejection 60 219 295 Call Settings 219 Additional Settings 221 General 219 Call Status Tones 219 Call Volume Adjusting 69 Call Waiting 72 221 Caller ID 221 Caller Ringtone Set as 149 Calling Using Wi Fi 66 Calls Making a 56 Multi party 71 Muting 70 Camcorder 132 Accessing the Video Folder 135 Options 133 Shooting Video 133 Camera 126 Camera Options 127 Taking Pictures 126 296 Care and Maintenance 260 Charging Battery 11 Children and Cell Phones 251 Clearing Application cache and data 166 CMAS 113 114 Alerts 113 Message Settings 113 Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS 254 Configuration Initial 14 Connections Accessing the Internet 188 Contact Copying to microSD Card 99 Copying to SIM Card 99 Creating a New 89 Joining 96 New From Keypad 90 Contact Entry Options 95 Contact List Options 94 Contact Menus Options 95 Contacts Adding a Number to Existing 93 Adding Your Facebook Friends 101 Additional Options 103 Default Storage Location 103 Deleting 93 Display Options 100 Displaying Contacts
236. n screen instructions to complete connection Ge Wi Fi Connected oN e Displays when Wi Fi is connected active and communicating with a Wireless Access Point WAP Wi Fi Communication Issue Displays when Wi Fi is active and there is an available open wireless network Note To avoid international data roaming fees when using Wi Fi calling when outside the United States the Data Roaming feature on your device must be turned off Note With certain rate plans minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes Activating Wi Fi Calling 1 Ensure that the Wi Fi connected icon displays on the status bar f prompted with an on screen Did you know your phone can make Calls over Wi Fi popup tap Learn and follow the remaining on screen instructions Tap Next gt and tap Done 2 Press ay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt Wi Fi Calling Note The red error icon shown below can be casues by problems such as Missing 911 Address or use of an Invalid SIM card 3 if Error displays in the Status Bar follow these steps to provide a 911 address for emergency location Log into my t mobile com e Click on Your Profile and edit the Customer Information e Enter your emergency location information and complete the online registration 4 Press cay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt Wi Fi Calling Settings Tap C
237. n screen disclaimer and tap agree Read the legal disclaimer screen and tap Yes to agree or No to disagree to its terms Tap OK to complete the activation process Review the on screen options such as e Recommended e Ringtones e CallerTunes e Applications e Games Applications and Development 179 T Mobile Name ID Allows you to modify the on screen Caller ID information Name ID identifies unknown callers by Name City and State 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt T Mobile Name 10 2 Choose an on screen option T Mobile TV T Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and Video on Demand p gt From the Home screen tap td Applications gt BD T Mobile TV For more information refer to T Mobile TV on page 151 T Mobile Video Chat This is a mobile video sharing and 2 way video calling service This application also lets you record and share experiences with your friends family and your favorite social networks 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt T Mobile Video Chat gt Get started 2 Fill in the Email address Username and Password then tap Go to create your new account 180 3 Follow the on screen instructions For more information visit http gik com To adjust application settings 1 Press and then tap Settings 2 Choose from any of the following options e Sharing allows you to setup sharing preferences Facebook set u
238. n take photographs and shoot video by using the built in camera functionality Your camera produces photos in JPEG format Important Do not take photos of people without their permission Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with another person s privacy Note An SD card is no longer needed to take pictures or shoot video since there is already 16GB of built in storage Using the Camera Taking Photos Taking pictures with your device s built in camera is as simple as choosing a subject pointing the camera then pressing the camera key Note When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions shadows may appear on the photo 126 From the Home screen tap Camera Using the phone s main display screen as a viewfinder adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject If desired before taking the photo use the left area of the screen to access various camera options and settings You can also tap the screen to move the focus to a desired area of interest Press Camera key until the shutter sounds The picture is automatically stored within your designated storage location If no microSD is installed all pictures are stored on the Phone For more information refer to Camera Options on page 127 Camera Options Options are represented by icons across both sides of the screen The following shortcuts a
239. n the Power saving alert notification has been activated You are then prompted to view your current battery level For more details on configuring your phone s settings see Changing Your Settings on page 210 28 Notification Bar The Notification area indicates new message events data sync status new messages calendar events call status etc You can expand this area to provide more detailed information about the current on screen notification icons 1 Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel 1 2 Tap a notification entry to open the associated application 2 Note The Notifications panel can also be opened on the Home screen by pressing and then tapping Notifications T Mobile m Sheri g Tap the status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel Tap Clear The notifications are cleared from the panel In addition to notifications this panel also provides quick and ready access to five device functions These can be quickly activated or deactivated 01 03 2012 10 16 AM ae O N or Silent Auto Wi Fi Bluetooth GPS mode rotation T Mobile Clear The following functions can either be activated green or deactivated white Wi Fi Bluetooth GPS Silent mode or Auto rotation Fun Your phone comes equipped with
240. nded Home Screens extend beyond the current visible screen width to provide more space for adding icons widgets and other customization features There are six available extended screens panels each of which may be populated with its own shortcuts or widgets These screens share the use of the three Primary Shortcuts The current screen is indicated at the bottom by a larger circle Up to seven 7 total screens are available Note Both the status bar and primary shortcuts are visible across all screens e Google search is an on screen Internet search engine powered by Google Touch to access the Voice Search feature where you can verbally enter a search term and initiate an online search Tap Voice Search 4 to launch the Voice Search function from within this Google widget e Widgets are self contained on screen applications not shortcuts These can be placed onto any of the available screens Home or extended e Shortcuts are icons that launch available device applications such as Camera YouTube Voicemail Contacts Phone Email Market etc These function the same as shortcuts on your computer Although some may already be found on the Extended Home screens the majority can also be found within the Applications screens The Application screens can be accessed by tapping Applications from the Primary shortcuts area Shortcuts can be removed from a screen and added back any number of times
241. nderstand that no secondary task should be performed while driving whether it be eating drinking talking to passengers or talking on a mobile phone unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their primary responsibility Do not engage in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes impaired Samsung is committed to promoting responsible driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand and address distractions Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and their accessories in the areas where you drive Always obey them The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas For example only hands free use may be permitted in certain areas Before answering calls consider your circumstances Let the call go to voicemail when driving conditions require Remember driving comes first not the call If you consider a call necessary and appropriate follow these tips Use a hands free device e Secure your phone within easy reach e Place calls when you are not moving e Plan calls when your car will be stationary e Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations e Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving and will suspend the c
242. ngs gt Privacy Mobile Backup and Restore The phone can be configured to back up your current settings application data and settings 1 Press Ol gt and then tap sO Settings gt Privacy 2 Tap Back up my data to create a backup of your current phone settings and applications 3 Tap Automatic restore to assist in the re installation of a previously installed application including preferences and data 4 Tap Factory data reset to perform a rest of the device back to factory settings and configuration Before you activate this feature please back up your data e For more information refer to Prior to doing a Factory Reset on page 238 238 For more information refer to Factory Data Reset on page 239 Prior to doing a Factory Reset Before using Kies air to upgrade your device or initiating a factory reset it is recommended that you backup your personal data prior to use To export a Contact list to your microSD card 1 From the Home screen tap a Contacts 2 Press and then tap More gt Import Export 3 Tap Export to SD card gt OK For more information refer to Export Import on page 103 Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt oa Gallery 2 Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos 3 Remove the back cover and remove the internal microSD card prior to initiating a Kies air update Factory Data R
243. ngs view support information personalize your CallerTunes Ringtones or Wallpapers or view battery storage information 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt My Device 2 Read the on screen information and tap OK Tip Use the Menu key to toggle between My Account and My Device The differences between My Account and My Device are these My Account check Activity set Alerts and Events review Billing and review your current Plan and services e My Device Support Quick Tools Personalize settings and Storage amp Battery The initial screen displays four tabs Personalize Quick Tools Support and Storage Battery Support Displays support information Device Restart Device Storage My Account Feedback T Mobile Forums and T Mobile on Twitter Quick Tools Quick Tools is a shortcut that allows you to view and configure the following features and parameters Wi Fi Bluetooth Data Roaming GPS Brightness Screen Timeout and Phone Info Personalize Using this menu you can personalize CallerTunes Ringtone and Wallpapers e CallerTunes allows you to choose songs for your callers to hear e Ringtones you can personalize your phone s ringtones by choosing from recordings voices and more Wallpapers you can personalize your phone s background by selecting wallpapers from the Shop Gallery Live Wallpapers and the Wallpaper Gallery Storage amp Battery From this tab you can
244. nnect incompatible products Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio Frequency RF signals However certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless mobile device Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives Implantable Medical Devices A minimum separation of six 6 inches should be maintained between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable medical device such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter defibrillator to avoid potential interference with the device Persons who have such devices Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six 6 inches from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON e Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket e Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to minimize the potential for interference Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your implantable medical device If you have any questions about using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device consult your health care provider For more information see http www fcc gov oet rfsafety rf fags html Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical devices consult the manufactur
245. nning before it can be detected by your device 4 Tap Connect The direct connection is then established 212 5 When prompted to complete the connection tap OK The status field now reads Connected and your connected device is listed within the Wi Fi Direct devices listing Wi Fi Calling You can configure your device to make and receive calls over an active Wi Fi connection Wi Fi Calling is an excellent solution for coverage issues in and around the home or wherever cellular coverage is limited Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes For more information refer to Wi Fi Calling on page 66 1 Ensure that the Wi Fi connected icon displays on the status bar 2 Press fay gt and then tap Ke Settings gt Wireless and network gt Wi Fi Calling Wi Fi Calling Settings Important A new ISIM card must be installed within the device prior to using this feature Wi Fi must first be active and communicating prior to launching Wi Fi Calling 1 Press Al gt and then tap Settings gt Wireless and network gt Wi Fi Calling Settings 2 Tap Connection Preferences and select a preference for use of the Wi Fi Calling feature e Wi Fi Preferred Wi Fi network is preferred over cellular network when making calls Calling requires you to stay in the Wi Fi range e Wi Fi Only Wi Fi network is required for making calls Calling requires you to stay in the W
246. ns You can also mirror image a photo Crop allows you to crop cut out an area of a photo Selection use the selection tool to mark an area for cropping rotating etc Selection Size allows you to set the size of the selection tool to Small Medium or Large Next move to next photo project Previous move to previous photo project Tools allows you to Copy and Paste to different images You can also use Warping and Fill se Effects allows you to add various effects to your aN photo 5 Press to access the following options New starts a new Photo editor project Be sure and save the photo you are working on before starting a new project Save saves your photo to your gallery e Share allows you to share your photo via AllShare Bluetooth Email Gmail Messaging Picasa Social Hub or Wi Fi Color allows you to adjust the Saturation Contrast Brightness of a photo You can also make it Grey scale Files Files allows you to manage your sounds images videos bluetooth files Android files and other memory card data in one convenient location This application allows you to launch a file if the associated application is already on your phone ex MP4 p From the Home screen tap Applications gt Files Note Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure with folders subfolders etc Note The application lets you view supported image files and text files on both your inte
247. nt s access Email and Password information and tap Log in Contacts 101 5 Tap those contact settings you wish to synchronize all are enabled by default A green circle indicates the feature is enabled Choose from Sync Contacts Sync Message or Sync Calendar 6 Tap Done to complete the login and sync process 7 Tap a to confirm your Facebook contacts are now synchronized and appear in your Contacts list To resync Social Network Contacts 1 Press fay gt and then tap gt Accounts and sync 2 Tap Q within the adjacent SNS account field to reveal the account s synchronization settings screen 3 Tap Sync now Note From the main Accounts and sync page you can also tap Sync all to resync all accounts 102 My Profile You can send this Virtual Business Card V card to other contacts as an attachment My Profile is the first Contact listed in the Contacts list Note As with any profile your profile can be associated with a group To create My Profile 1 From the Home screen tap Ba 2 Press and then tap My profile To edit My Profile 1 With My profile displayed press and then tap Edit 2 Modify any of the information contained in My Profile then tap Save Additional Contact Options Sending an Email to a Contact Note Contacts must contain and email account and address before you can use the Send email feature 1 From the Home screen tap a 2 Press and then tap More gt Send ema
248. o home page http home web2go com 188 Homepage When you access the Browser the web2go home page displays the following topics e Google Search allows you to quickly search for online topics using the Google search engine Advertisement provides an on screen scroll of today s top stories e Recommended for you provides recommended apps Hot Trends provides quick links to current Internet hot topics Quick Links provides a series of application shortcuts These shortcuts can be edit and managed e Headlines displays current Weather and headline information These entries can be edit and configured e Directory provides a grid listing of additional social media news and other links Tap Show More Categories to reveal additional entries Navigating with the Browser 1 To select an item tap an entry 2 To scroll through a website sweep the screen with your finger in an up or down motion 3 To return to the previous page press l Browser Options 1 From the home page press to access the following options window displays a new window so you can browse multiple S e Windows displays a list of the windows you have open e Browser brightness allows you to manually adjust the screen brightness Note If the Automatic brightness feature is enabled Settings gt Display gt Brightness you can not modify the browser s brightness setting e Refresh reloads the current page e Forward forwa
249. o Ltd and its affiliated companies and its third party suppliers and licensors that accompanies this EULA which includes computer software and may include associated media printed materials online or electronic documentation Software BY CLICKING THE I ACCEPT BUTTON OR IF YOU BYPASS OR OTHERWISE DISABLE THE I ACCEPT AND STILL INSTALL COPY DOWNLOAD ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS EULA IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS IN THIS EULA YOU MUST CLICK THE DECLINE BUTTON AND DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE 1 GRANT OF LICENSE Samsung grants you the following rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA You may install use access display and run one copy of the Software on the local hard disk s or other permanent storage media of one computer and use the Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time and you may not make the Software available over a network where it could be used by multiple computers at the same time You may make one copy of the Software in machine readable form for backup purposes only provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the original 2 RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP Samsung reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and treat
250. o play with it because they could hurt themselves and others damage the mobile device or make calls that increase your mobile device bill Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children 266 FCC Notice and Cautions FCC Notice The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in close proximity to receiving equipment The FCC can require you to stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be eliminated Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas such as propane or butane must comply with the National Fire Protection Standard NFPA 58 For a copy of this standard contact the National Fire Protection Association Cautions Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly approved in this document could void your warranty for this equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment Only use approved batteries antennas and chargers The use of any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the mobile device Although your mobile device is quite sturdy it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken Avoid dropping hitting bending or sitting on it Other Important Safety Information e Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or install the mobile device in a vehicle Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate an
251. o search for events for the selected Month Week or Day or you can look for events for a future date 2 Press and select one of the following options e Create creates a new Event e Go to displays a specific date e Today displays the date highlighted with a Blue box highlighting the date e Search allows you to search within your current events 206 Delete allows you to delete All events All events before today or an individual event e Settings displays a list of configurable settings Creating a Calendar Event 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt Calendar 2 From the Month tab press gt Create Calendar Settings Using the Calendar settings you can select the day with which you want the calendar to begin You also select how you want to view the calendar by Month Week or Day or determine how to manage events notifications sounds and defaults reminders 1 From the Home screen tap ta Applications gt 2 Press gt Settings 3 Tap Calendars and select the calendar categories you want to display or tap All calendar A check mark indicates selection 4 Tap Default view and select a view Month Week Day or List 5 Tap Day views and select a type Time grid or Event list 6 Tap First day of week and select either Sunday or Monday 7 Tap Hide declined events to activate this option A check mark indicates selection 8 Tap Hide contacts anniversary even
252. o their safety within their area There is no charge for receiving an Emergency Alert message There are three types of Emergency Alerts e Alerts issued by the President e Alerts involving imminent threats to safety of life e AMBER Alerts missing child alert Customers may choose not to receive Extreme Alerts Severe Alerts and AMBER Alerts Important Alerts issued by the President can not be disabled 114 To disable lExtreme Severe and AMBER Alerts 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Press and then tap Settings 3 Scroll to the bottom and select CMAS alerts All alerts are enabled by default checkmark showing 4 Tap on an alert option to disable the alert and remove the checkmark Text Templates This screen displays your available text message reply templates This is a readily accessible list of both default and user defined text snippets that can be used to quickly reply to incoming messages 1 From the Home screen tap 2 From the Messaging list press and then tap Text templates 3 Tap a message to immediately insert it into your current message conversation To create your own text template 1 From the Home screen tap SS 2 From the Messaging list press and then tap Text templates 3 Tap Create template 4 Enter a new text string and tap Save Email Email or Internet Email enables you to review and create email using several email services You can also receive text message alert
253. oads Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current downloaded files Internet and Other For more information referto Downloads on page 158 Email Provides access to both your Outlook Exchange Server based work email and Internet email accounts such as Gmail and Yahoo Mail For more information refer to Email on page 115 W Files j l C 3 Lets you view supported image files and text files on both your internal storage and microSD card Organize and store data images and more in your own personal file folders Files are stored to either the internal storage or memory card in separate user defined folders For more information refer to Files on page 136 Gallery Displays a Gallery of camera images and video stored in the microSD card For more information refer to The Gallery on page 137 Game Base Provides access to a game rental and purchase services for compatible T Mobile Android devices For more information refer to Game Base on page 158 Gmail Provides access to your Gmail account Google Mail Gmail is a web based email service Gmail is configured when you first set up your phone For more information refer to Using Google Mail on page 123 Google Search Provides an on screen Internet search engine powered by Google For more information refer to Using Google Search on page 31 Kies air Allows you to sync your Wind
254. older e Delete Erases selected bookmarks Tap a bookmark to view the webpage or touch and hold a bookmark for the following options e Open Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark e Open in new window Opens the webpage in a new window e Edit bookmark Allows you to edit the name or URL of the bookmark For more information refer to Editing Bookmarks on page 191 e Add shortcut to Home Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked webpage to your phone s Home screen e Share link Allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth Email Gmail Messaging My tag Social Hub or Wi Fi Copy link URL Allows you to copy the URL address to use in a message e Delete bookmark Allows you to delete a bookmark For more information refer to Deleting Bookmarks on page 191 e Set as homepage Sets the bookmark to your new homepage Adding Bookmarks 1 From the Home webpage tap gt Add 2 Use the on screen keypad to enter the name of the bookmark and the URL 3 Assign a folder location Home is the default 4 Tap OK The new save page now appears on the Bookmarks page Editing Bookmarks 1 From the Bookmarks page touch and hold the bookmark you want to edit 2 Tap Edit bookmark 3 Use the on screen keypad to edit the name of the bookmark or the URL 4 Tap OK Deleting Bookmarks 1 From the Bookmarks page touch and hold the bookmark you want to delete Tap Delete bookmark At the
255. omatically uses Wi Fi when available for all your mobile phone services 1 Press fay gt and then tap sO Settings gt Wireless and network gt Wi Fi settings 2 Configure the settings as desired The available connection types displayed with a security type displayed next to them Network Notification By default when Wi Fi is on you receive notifications in the Status bar anytime your phone detects an available Wi Fi network You can deactivate this feature if you do not want to receive notifications 1 Press ay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt Wi Fi settings 2 Tap Network notification A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates Network notification is active 3 Tap Network notification again to remove the check mark and deactivate this feature WPS Button Connection The WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup button is a standard for easy and secure wireless network set up and connections To use WPS the connecting device must support WPS and be compatible with Wi Fi Protected Access WPA security WPS can automatically set up a random network name and WPA wireless security for wireless Wi Fi phones routers access points computers adapters and other electronic devices WPS allows you to push buttons instead of entering a network name and wireless security PIN 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt Wi Fi settings 2 Tap WPS butto
256. on off 15 Phone number Finding 56 Phone Options 223 Phone Ringtone 224 Set as 149 Photo Editor 176 Photos Options 130 131 Sharing 130 131 Pico TTS 243 Play Store 164 Polaris Office 177 Power Control 14 Power Key Ends Calls 244 Power Saving LCD Adjustment 226 Power Saving Mode 226 Activate 227 Additional Parameters 227 Setting Launch Levels 227 Power Savings 14 Predictive Text Using XT9 86 Predictive text Using XT9 85 Primary Shortcuts 34 Adding and Deleting 48 Proximity Sensor Activation 219 Q Quick Dialing 56 Quick Messaging 108 R Recently used Applications Accessing 38 Redialing the last number 64 Reducing Exposure Hands Free Kits and Other Accessories 250 Reject Call Rejection Messages 219 Reject Calls Managing 60 Reject List 75 Add To 60 Adding a Single Entry 60 Adding and Removing 95 Rejection List Assigning Multiple Numbers 60 Assigning Single Numbers 60 Rejection Messages 219 Remote Security Administration 120 Reset 239 Responsible Listening 261 Restore 238 Restricting Children s Access to Your Mobile device 266 Ringtone Phone 224 S Samsung Account App Installing 140 Samsung Keyboard Settings 241 Samsung Keypad 82 ABC Mode 84 Changing the Input Type 84 Enabling 83 Entering Symbols 85 Spell Correction 86 Symbol Numeric Mode 85 Samsung Mobile Products and Recy cling 256 Save a Number From Keypad 90 Screen Home 32 Navigation 35 Screen Lock Changing 229 Set Up 229 Sounds
257. onnection Preferences and select a preference for use of the Wi Fi Calling feature Wi Fi Preferred Wi Fi network is preferred over cellular network when making calls Calling requires you to stay in the Wi Fi range e Wi Fi Only Wi Fi network is required for making calls Calling requires you to stay in the Wi Fi range e Cellular Preferred The cellular network is preferred over a Wi Fi network when making calls Tap OK to save the setting Press Fay gt and then tap lt O Settings gt Wireless and network Tap Wi Fi Calling to toggle off the feature then tap it again to reactivate the feature and re register your device with the T Mobile Network Confirm Wi Fi Calling Ready displays in the Status Bar Call Functions and Contacts List 67 Launching Wi Fi Calling Note Verify you are currently connected to a Wireless Access Point 1 Ensure that the Wi Fi connected icon displays on the status bar 2 Confirm Wi Fi Calling Ready displays in the Status Bar When Action Then Displays on the You are connected to the screen status T Mobile network and can bar make Wi Fi calls Displays on the The feature is active and you screen status are using with within your bar current active call Does not display You are charged normal calling onthe screen rate minutes For more status bar information referto Activating Wi Fi Calling on page 67 68 Displays on the screen
258. ons of this License which will remain in full force and effect 10 2 No failure or delay by any party to exercise any right power or remedy will operate as a waiver of it nor will any partial exercise preclude any further exercise of the same or of some other right power or remedy 10 3 The parties to this License do not intend that any of its terms will be enforceable by any person not a party to it 10 4 This License contains all the terms which the parties have agreed in relation to the subject matter of this License and supersedes any prior written or oral agreements representations or understandings between the parties in relation to such subject matter 10 5 Licensor reserves the right to revise the terms of this License by updating the License on its web site or by notifying you by post or by e mail You are advised to check the Licensor s website periodically for notices concerning revisions Your 292 continued use of the Software shall be deemed to constitute acceptance of any revised terms 10 6 You will be deemed to have accepted the terms of this License by using the Software on any device Index Numerics 2 Sec Pause Adding 59 2G Network Using 217 3G Network 218 Using 218 411 amp More 153 4G 203 215 4G Network 217 Using 217 A Accessibility Settings 244 Accessibility Shortcut 244 Accessing Recently used applications 38 Voice mail 17 Accounts 153 Accounts and Sync 153 Adding Contacts 101
259. ontent This option blocks these videos from appearing within your search results Choose from Don t filter Moderate or Strict blocking 186 Help provides answers to most YouTube questions Feedback allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube Google Mobile Terms of Service YouTube Terms of Service e Google Mobile Privacy Policy YouTube Privacy Policy e Open source licenses displayslicense details for open source software e Application version displays the software version for the current YouTube application To watch a high quality video p gt Press and then tap Settings gt High quality on mobile Zinio Launches a digital magazine reader Zinio has transformed your favorite print magazines into digital format 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt BB zio 2 Tap Continue gt Sign In if you already have an account or Tap Continue Join Zinio to create an account and continue 3 Follow the on screen prompts Applications and Development 187 Section 10 Connections Your phone is equipped with features that allow you to quickly connect to the web Web Your phone is equipped with a Google browser to navigate the mobile web This section explains how to navigate the browser and use the basic features Accessing the Internet To access the Browser p gt From the Home screen tap td Applications gt amp wen Note You must disable your Wi Fi connection if you wish to view the web2g
260. oogle Talk 45 181 GPS amp AGPS 258 Groups Adding an Member to an Existing Group 104 Creating a new caller group 104 Deleting 105 Deleting a Caller Group 105 Editing a Caller Group 105 Removing an Entry 104 Settings 105 GSM 217 H HAC 221 HAC Hearing Aid Compliant 220 Haptic Feedback 225 Vibration Setting 224 Health and Safety Information 248 Hearing Aids 221 Hold Placing a Call on Hold 69 Home 32 Home Key 30 Home Screen Overview 32 Wallpaper 225 Home screens Customizing 47 Horizontal Calibration 226 HSPA 203 215 l Icons Description 24 Indicator 24 Status 24 Images Assigning as a Contact icon 132 Assigning as wallpaper 132 Transferring 199 238 Verifying 199 238 Importing and Exporting To SIM card 103 In call Options 69 70 Incoming Call Vibration Setting 224 Volume Setting 224 Indicator icons 24 Input Languages 86 242 International Call 62 International Calls Making 62 Internet 188 Search 189 Internet Downloads 158 Internet Email 115 ISIM Overview 8 J Joining Contact information 96 K Kies Air 159 Before Using 198 L LinkedIn Adding Contacts From 101 299 Live Wallpapers 225 Lock Screen Clock Position 225 Event Notifications 225 Viewing Messages 109 Viewing Missed Calls 76 Wallpaper 225 Logs 73 Accessing 73 Accessing from Notifications 74 Altering Numbers 75 Erasing 76 Low battery indicator 13 M Making Emergency Calls 57 International Calls 62 New call 56 Managing A
261. orce or apply our rights and agreements or when we believe in good faith that disclosing this information is necessary or advisable including for example to protect the rights property or safety of the Service and Samsung our users or others CHILDREN The Service is not designed for use by children without their parent s supervision We ask that anyone under the age of sixteen 16 not submit any personal information through the Service We do not knowingly collect any personal information from children under the age of eighteen and therefore we do not knowingly distribute such information to third parties SECURITY OF THE INFORMATION WE COLLECT The security of your personal information is important to us We maintain physical electronic and procedural safeguards to secure your personal information However there is always some risk in transmitting information electronically The personal information we collect is stored within databases that we control As we deem appropriate we use security measures consistent with industry standards such as firewalls and encryption technology to protect your information However we cannot guarantee the security of our databases nor can we guarantee that information you supply won t be intercepted while being transmitted to us over the Internet CHAT ROOMS AND OTHER PUBLIC AREAS Our third party service and content providers may offer chat user reviews bulletin boards or other publi
262. oth the correct and incorrect orientation for connecting the charger If the charger is incorrectly connected damage to the accessory port will occur therefore voiding the phone s warranty 5 When charging is finished first unplug the charger s power plug from the AC wall outlet then disconnect the charger s connector from the phone Important If your handset has a touch screen display please note that a touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your finger or a non metallic stylus Using excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void the warranty For more information refer to Standard Limited Warranty on page 268 Low Battery Indicator When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of talk time remain a warning tone sounds and the Battery low message repeats at regular intervals on the display In this condition your phone conserves its remaining battery power by dimming the backlight When the battery level becomes too low the phone automatically turns off Extending Your Battery Life Active applications light levels Bluetooth usage and GPS functionality all act to drain your battery The following is a list of helpful tips that can help conserve your battery power Reduce your backlight on time e Turn Bluetooth off when not in use e Turn Wi Fi off when not in use e Deactivate the GPS when not ne
263. oth your online library and your device s internal storage for music and playlists this can take from a few seconds to several minutes depending on the amount of new music added since you last opened the application It then displays a carousel view of your new and recent music organized by album 2 Swipe left or right to browse through your new and available music Music albums and artists are grouped into categories 3 Tap an on screen album to open it and begin playback 4 Return to the Library screen from most other screens in the Music application by tapping the Music application icon Ty Music notification icon at the top left of the Application bar Changing Library View You can change the way you view the contents of your library 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Music 2 Tap P or tab name near the top left of the Application bar to back up to the main Music App menu 3 Available tabs include RECENT ARTISTS ALBUMS SONGS PLAYLISTS or GENRES Note The contents of your library display in a scrolling grid or list view depending on the view Multimedia 143 Searching for Music in Your Library 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt P Music Tap Search to search through your available songs Press E Type the name of an artist album song or playlist Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search box Tap a matching song to play it tap a matching
264. otified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone For more information refer to Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 221 To answer a new call while you have a call in progress 1 In a single motion touch and slide in any direction to answer the new incoming call Tap an option from the on screen menu e Putting XX on hold to place the previous caller on hold while you answer the new incoming call e Ending call with XXX to end the previous call and answer the new call Note The new caller appears at the top of the list The previous caller is placed on hold and appears at the bottom of the list 3 Tap Swap to switch between the two calls This places the new caller on hold and activates the previous call Important The currently active call is displayed with a green background 4 Tap Swap again to switch back Logs Tab The Logs tab is a list of the phone numbers or Contacts entries for calls you placed accepted or missed The Logs tab makes redialing a number fast and easy It is continually updated as your device automatically adds new numbers to the beginning of the list and removes the oldest entries from the bottom of the list The Notification area of the Home screen upper left displays phone notifications status or alerts such as Fad Displays when a call is in progress Displays when a call was missed Accessing the Logs Tab os 1 From the Home screen tap K gt Log
265. ou can not use data on the device while it is being used as a hotspot Connections 203 To activate the Mobile HotSpot service 1 NS of p Note Note 204 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt USB tethering and Mobile HotSpot Tap Mobile HotSpot settings gt OK Tap Mobile HotSpot This places a checkmark in the adjacent field to activate the service Tap OK to continue with the activation Tap Configure Mobile HotSpot Create a new Network SSID name and then write it down Confirm the HotSpot service icon A appears at the top of the screen By default the connection is open and not secured It is recommended that you access the MobileWi Fi Hotspot settings and create a secure connection by using a password for communication Using your 4G service and Mobile Wi Fi Hotspot drains your phone s battery at a much faster rate than when using any other feature combination The best way to keep using the phone as a hotspot is to have it connected to a power supply To connect to the Mobile Hotspot 1 Enable Wi Fi wireless functionality on your target device laptop media device etc Scan for Wi Fi networks from the device and select your phone hotspot from the network list e The SSID name for your phone s hotspot is determined by what you entered into the Network SSID field You can change the name by tapping Configure Mobile HotSpot gt Network SSID and chang
266. ou live you must review the Terms and have your parent or legal guardian accept the Terms on your behalf in order for you to use the Service The person accepting the Terms on your behalf must be legally competent Your Information When required to provide information in connection with your use of the Service you agree to provide truthful and complete information Providing misleading information about your identity is forbidden When you first use the Service you may be required to create a username and a password You and your parent or legal guardian if you are a minor are personally responsible for any use of the Service with your username and password You agree to take due care in protecting your username and password against misuse by others and promptly notify Samsung about any misuse 278 Termination of Service Samsung may terminate or restrict your access to certain parts of the Service if there is an indication that you have breached the Terms or at any time in its sole discretion Your Material Except as set forth in the Social Hub Privacy Policy Samsung shall not be responsible for any removal of the information or content you have submitted in the course of using the Service Material when your access to the Service is terminated Your submission of Material in the course of using the Service does not transfer ownership rights in the Material to Samsung After the Material is removed from the Service by ei
267. our finger or stylus from letter to letter lifting your finger between words SWYPE uses error correcting algorithms and a language model to predict the next word SWYPE also includes a touch predictive text system The on screen keyboard options are different between the Android keyboard and Swype on screen input methods Enabling and Configuring SWYPE If you configure another text input method Samsung keypad you must re enable SWYPE before using the SWYPE keyboard When SWYPE is enabled there can also be normal keyboard functionality 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Language and keyboard 2 Tap Select input method gt Swype 78 SWYPE Settings To configure Swype settings 1 Press fay gt and then tap gt Language and keyboard gt Swype 2 Tap Select Input Method to switch between keyboard types Choose from either Samsung keypad or Swype 3 Tap How to Swype to view an on screen manual for Swype 4 Tap Personal Dictionary to access and manage your personal dictionary 5 Tap Preferences to alter these settings e Audio feedback turns on sounds generated by the Swype application e Vibrate on keypress activates a vibration sensation as you enter text using the keypad Show tips tums on a flashing indicator for quick help Auto spacing automatically inserts a space between words When you finish a word just lift your finger or stylus and start the next word e Auto capita
268. out SIM 58 Emoticons 108 Ending Acall 57 Entering Text 77 Using SWYPE 78 297 Erasing files from Memory card 55 Event Notifications 225 Exchange Email 118 Account Setup 119 Composing 121 Configuring Settings 121 Deleting Message 121 Opening 120 Refreshing Messages 120 Exposure to Radio Frequency RF Sig nals 248 Extreme Alert Disable 114 Facebook Video Chat 180 Factory Data Reset 239 Prior To 238 Factory data reset 55 Favorites Tab 106 FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC 298 Regulations for Wireless Devices 264 FCC Notice and Cautions 266 Fixed Dialing Numbers 221 Folder Creating and Managing 51 Deleting 52 Renaming 51 Font Style 225 Font Size Caption 186 Text Messages 112 Friends Viewing 94 G Gallery Folder Options 130 Image Options 131 Opening 137 Getting Started 6 Battery 10 Battery Cover 7 Locking Unlocking the Device 15 microSD card 9 SIM Card 8 Switching Device On Off 15 Voice Mail 17 Gmail 123 159 Composing a message 123 Creating and Additional Account 124 Opening 123 Refreshing 123 Signing In 123 Viewing 124 Google Account Management Settings 236 Account Syncronization 236 Add Account 236 Adding a Sync Account 236 Create New Account 16 Merge Contacts 94 Retrieving Password 17 Set Search Engine 193 Signing into Your Account 16 Google Books 155 Google mail see also Gmail 123 Google Maps Enabling a location source 162 Opening a map 163 Google Music 143 171 G
269. ovide the specific requirements for the promotion You may also have the opportunity to opt in to special offers from our advertisers in connection with these promotions Warranty Information 287 ACCURACY OF THE INFORMATION WE COLLECT Any questions you may have regarding this Privacy Policy the accuracy of your personal information or the use of your personal information or any requests that we correct update or remove your information in our databases should be directed via e mail to s dufresne Samsung com or via regular mail to Samsung Telecommunications America LLC 1301 E Lookout Drive Richardson TX 75082 Attn Customer Support Department After receiving a request to change your information we will make reasonable efforts to ensure that all of your personal information stored in databases we actively use to operate the Service will be updated corrected changed or deleted as appropriate as soon as reasonably practicable However we reserve the right to retain in our archival files any information we remove from or change in our active databases We may retain such information to resolve disputes troubleshoot problems and enforce our Terms In addition it is not technologically possible to remove each and every record of the information you have provided to us A copy of your personal information may exist in a non erasable form that will be difficult or impossible for us to locate 288 CHANGES TO PRIVACY POLICY
270. ower Saving Mode 200 e cece eee eee 226 Location and Security 2 c0 e0eeceec seeds 228 Screen Unlock Pattern Settings 0005 228 Pa a LE E eee ee ee 232 Android Development 0 cece eee ee eee 235 Accounts and Synchronization 000 00s 235 MOTION S HINGS a cscsciesercteadanine eens Heke ae 237 Privacy SetungS cc c0cc cccccireceesa REER RENTIS 238 SD Card amp Phone Storage 000 e eee eee ee 239 Search SettingS 2 6 0 2 e ee eee sere ceri iina 239 Language amp Keyboard SettingS 00cee eee 240 Voice Input and Output Settings 0 242 Accessibility Settings 0 ccc cece eee 244 DOCK ited dcerteiaynmie estat seed eee et ead aden 244 Date and TME ssa ze setae tiarekiey OTE nos bee 244 ADOULIPNONG gesen case duane isoine hi nuana adai 245 Software Update sci a raa naai ERRA 246 INFORMATION THAT WE COLLECT 0 Section 13 Health and Safety Information 248 USE OF INFORMATION WE COLLECT Exposure to Radio Frequency RF Signals 248 DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO THIRD PARTIES 285 Specific Absorption Rate SAR Certification Information 252 CHILDREN 8 is a ipine striae teak atta deat el aca 286 FCC Part 15 Information to User 200008 253 SECURITY OF THE INFORMATION WE COLLECT 287 Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS 254 CHAT ROO
271. ows PC wirelessly with your phone as long as both are on the same Wi Fi network You can now have real time access of your phone through your PC to view call logs videos photos bookmarks IMs and even send SMS messages directly from your home computer For more information refer to Kies Air on page 199 Latitude Lets you see your friends locations and share yours with them The application also lets you see your friends locations on a map or in a list It also lets you send instant messages and emails make phone calls and get directions to your friends locations For more information refer to Latitude on page 159 Understanding Your Device 41 i 42 Lookout Security Lookout provides mobile device specific security features that are coupled with a minimal performance hit For more information refer to Lookout Security on page 161 Maps Launches a Web based dynamic map that helps you find local businesses locate friends view maps and get driving directions For more information refer to Maps on page 162 Market Allows you to find and download free and for purchase applications on Android Market For more information refer to Downloading a New Google Application on page 164 This application might be updated after your initial setup and connection Please note that this document describes this application as it appears by default If prompted follow t
272. p an album or song list and play a song 3 Tap ines adjacent to the song name and select Add to playlist 4 Select the desired target playlist Playing a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap kd Applications gt P Music 2 Select the PLAYLISTS tab 3 Tap next to a playlist title and tap Play Deleting a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt a Music 2 Display the PLAYLISTS library view 3 Tap next to a playlist title and tap Delete Music Player Playing Music 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt Music Player Music player tips display 2 Tap Done 3 Touch a tab to select the music category All Playlists Albums or Artists 4 Scroll through the list and tap an entry to begin playback Multimedia 147 Note The 5 1 channel sound effect works when earphones or sound is aie displays the current song in the player window connected through the headset jack only 5 The following Music Player controls are available Making a Song a Phone Ringtone Pause the song 1 From the Home screen tap co Applications gt Music Player 2 Tap the All tab Start the song after pausing Press and hold to rewind the song Tap to go to y 3 Touch and hold a song from the list to reveal the previous song on screen context menu Press and hold to fast forward the song Tap to go to next song 4 Tap Set as gt Phone ringtone Volume control Allows you to li
273. p your Qik credentials for Facebook posting of videos Twitter set up your Twitter account sharing preferences YouTube set up your Qik credentials for YouTube posting of videos Contacts set up your contact sharing parameters e Privacy allows you to select who can find you and see your videos e Location allows you to select the level of location accuracy that is embedded into your Qik videos When posting or sharing Qik video information with others you can decide how accurate the related location information can be Choose from Off City level Street level or Track live e Video encoding quality allows you to assign a video quality to the outbound video Choose from Low Normal or High e Incoming ringtone Premium allows you to assign a ringtone to incoming video calls This feature requires a premium account e About displays the version information for the Qik Video Chat application e Qik Premium displays information about the premium services Recording a Video Chat 1 From the Home screen tap T Mobile Video Chat 2 Tap Record amp Share Applications gt 3 Read the one time disclaimer describing the public nature of your videos and tap OK 4 Tap Record to start recording ior Tap Stop to end the recording process 5 Enter a title for your video segment and select those services you wish to use to distribute your video e Services such as Twitter Facebook YouTube SMS and E mail
274. pect to the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA If any provision of this EULA is held to be void invalid unenforceable or illegal the other provisions shall continue in full force and effect Social Hub Legal Terms and Privacy Samsung s Social Hub and if applicable the website where you accessed this Disclaimer collectively the Service is being made available to you by Samsung Electronics Co Ltd and its affiliates and suppliers collectively Samsung subject to the following enclosed documents e Social Hub Terms and Conditions which governs your use of the Service generally e Social Hub End User License Agreement which specifically governs your use of the software which forms part of or enables you to access the Service and e Social Hub Privacy Policy which governs our collection and use of personal information in connection with your access to and use of the Service By using the Service you agree to be bound by the above documents Please read through those documents to make sure you understand the basis on which Samsung is providing the Service to you You will be able to access additional features available at socialhub samsungmobile com Social Hub Terms and Conditions Acceptance of the Terms These Social Hub Terms and Conditions together with the Social Hub Privacy Policy and Social Hub End User Licence Agreement collectively Terms govern your use of Social Hub which compr
275. pictures Tap the checkmark to turn it green next to any file or folder you want to delete then tap Confirm deletions More provides you with the additional options such as Share via allows you to share your file via YouTube Play via allows you to play your selected file via AllShare Rename allows you to rename one or more video files Send to allows you to send the file to a Contacts entry New Email address or New Phone number Set Default Destination allows you to assign a default action to take after taking an image Contacts New Email address or New Phone number Details displays video file information Photo Editor The Photo editor application provides basic editing functions for pictures that you take on your phone Along with basic image tuning like brightness contrast and color it also provides a wide variety of effects used for editing the picture 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt ZZ Photo editor 2 Tap Select picture to edit a picture in your Gallery Tap Capture picture to take a picture with the camera Multimedia 135 3 Tap the picture and it is loaded into the Photo editor 4 Use the following Photo editor controls to edit your picture 136 ag D g e H Move use the move feature to move a photo around when you are zoomed in and the entire photo is not showing on the screen Rotate allows you to rotate a photo in all 4 directio
276. port The name and phone number for the selected contact is then copied to the SIM Copying Contact Information to the microSD Card This procedure allows you to copy entry information saved on the phone s memory onto the SIM card Note These must be contacts stored on the phone External entries Google Exchange etc can not be transferred in this manner 1 From the Home screen tap Ba 2 From the Contacts List press and then tap More gt Import Export gt Export to SD card 3 Tap OK to choose all current phone contact entries Contacts 99 Synchronizing Contacts Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you to add and manage a new or existing contact from your online or remote accounts to your phone Prior to syncing you must first have an active Google or Microsoft Exchange account with current Contact entries and be signed into your account via the phone With syncing any Contacts entries with phone numbers email addresses pictures etc are updated and synced with your phone For more information about syncing existing managed accounts see Accounts and Synchronization on page 235 1 Press fay gt and then tap Oo gt Accounts and sync 2 Locate the email account containing the contacts you wish to synchronize 3 Tap Qo within the adjacent account field to reveal the account s synchronization settings screen 4 To synchronize Contacts tap Sync Contacts A green checkmark ind
277. pplications 232 Clearing Application Cache 232 Moving Third party Applications to Card 233 Uninstalling Third party Applications 233 300 Market 164 Marking contact As a default 97 Mass Storage 54 198 214 Media Volume Setting 224 Media Hub 140 167 Creating a New Account 141 Using 141 Memo Options 167 Memory card Erasing files from the 55 Merge Calls 71 Merge with Google 94 Message Options 108 Read 109 Reply 110 Thread Options 110 Threads 110 Message Search 112 Message threads 110 Messaging Creating and sending 107 Creating and Sending Text Messages 107 Deleting a message 111 Font Size 112 Google Mail 123 Icons on the Status Bar 107 Insert Smiley 108 Options 108 Settings 112 Signing into Google Mail 123 Text Templates 114 Types of Messages 107 Viewing from Lock Screen 109 Viewing new 109 microSD Card Insertion 9 Removal 10 Microsoft Exchange 89 115 Missed Call Viewing from Lock Screen 76 Mobile HotSpot 203 Activating 204 Connecting 204 Securing 204 Mobile Networks 216 Data Roaming 216 Mobile NetworksUse Packet Data 216 Mobile Web 188 Entering Text in the Mobile Web Browser 189 Navigating with the Mobile Web 188 Using Bookmarks 190 MobileLife Contacts Backup 89 MobileLife Family Organizer 168 Create a New Account 169 Create an Appointment 170 Logging In 169 Mono Audio 244 Motion Settings 237 Mounting the SD card 54 Move to SD card 233 Multi Party Call 71 Dropping One Participant 72 Private
278. ps Applications and Development 163 Market Android Market provides access to downloadable applications and games to install on your phone Android Market also allows you to provide feedback and comments about an application or flag an application that might be incompatible with your phone Accessing the Market 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt 4 es Market 2 If not already logged in with your Google account tap Next 3 Tap Signin and enter your Google account information 4 Tap Accept to agree to the Android Market terms of service 164 Downloading a New Google Application To download a new application you will need to use your Google account to sign in to Android Market The Android Market home page provides several ways to find applications The home page features applications and includes a list of item applications by category a list of games a link to search and a link to My apps This application might be updated after your initial setup and connection Please note that this document describes this application as it appears by default If prompted follow the on screen instructions to update the related application icon and features The Market application might then be called Play Store and be displayed as gt 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt gt Market 2 Browse through the categories find an application you re interested in and tap the name 3 Read t
279. pt enter your PIN2 code and tap OK Important Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code If your SIM card does not this menu does not display The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier Entering an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock Contact customer service for assistance Changing Your Settings 221 Changing the PIN2 Code 1 oOo Pf BM Important Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code If your SIM card does not this Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Call gt Additional settings gt Fixed Dialing Numbers Tap Change PIN2 At the prompt enter your old PIN2 code At the prompt enter a new PIN2 code Confirm your PIN2 code menu does not display The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier Entering the PIN2 incorrectly three times will cause the device to lock Contact customer service for assistance Managing the FDN List When this feature is enabled you can make calls only to phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card 1 222 Press fa gt and then tap OP Settings gt Call gt Additional settings gt Fixed Dialing Numbers Tap Enable FDN At the prompt enter your PIN2 code and tap OK FDN is enabled 4 Tap FDN list then press and then tap Add contact or edit the contacts that were stored Important Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code If your SIM card does not this menu does not display The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier Entering the P
280. r more information refer to Music Player on page 147 My Account Provides you with account specific information such as current status Activity Set Alerts Bill Summary Plan Services and FAQ s Info For more information refer to My Account on page 171 NETFLIX My Device Allows you to configure device settings view Personalize your CallerTunes Ringtones or Wallpapers View Quick Tools Support and battery storage information For more information refer to My Device on page 172 Navigation Launches a Web based navigation application Caution Traffic data is not real time and directions may be wrong dangerous prohibited or involve ferries For more information refer to Navigation on page 173 Netflix Netflix isaservice offering online streaming service that allows you to watch TV Shows amp Movies directly on your phone For more information refer to Netflix on page 175 News amp Weather Launches a Web based news and weather feed based on your current location For more information refer to News amp Weather on page 176 Understanding Your Device 43 Zi 44 Photo editor Provides basic editing functions for pictures you have taken on your phone In addition to basic image tuning such as brightness contrast and color it also provides several picture editing effects For more information refer to Photo Editor on page 135 Places Di
281. r the display such as the font orientation pop up notifications puzzle lock feature animation brightness screen timeout and power saving mode Adjusting the Screen Display 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Display 2 Configure the following screen display settings e Screen display Font style sets the fonts used on the LCD display Selections are Default font or Get fonts online Tap Get fonts online to download additional fonts Home screen Wallpaper assigns an image from either the Gallery Live wallpapers or Wallpaper gallery to the Home screen Lock screen Wallpaper assigns an image from either the Wallpaper gallery or Gallery to the Lock screen Lock screen Clock position assigns the on screen clock position to either the Top Middle or Bottom of the screen Lock screen Event notifications assigns what type of on screen notification you are prompted with Choose from either New messages or New emails Changing Your Settings 225 e Brightness adjusts the on screen brightness level For more information refer to Adjusting Screen Brightness on page 226 e Auto rotate screen when enabled the phone automatically switches from portrait to landscape orientation and vice versa When this setting is disabled the phone displays in portrait mode only e Animation determines whether some or all of the window elements animate Selections are No animations Some animat
282. rds the browser to another web page e More displays the following additional options Add bookmark allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list Add shortcut to Home adds a shortcut to your web2go homepage on your phone s Home screen Find on page allows you to search in the current page Page info displays information about the selected page Share page allows you to share the page using Gmail or as a message Downloads displays the download history Settings allows you to change the way you view your web pages by changing these options See Browser Settings on page 192 Print provides print access on compatible Samsung printers Entering a URL You can access a website quickly by entering the URL Websites are optimized for viewing on your phone To enter a URL and go to a particular website p From the homepage tap the URL field at the top of the screen enter the URL and tap gt Note This is not the same application as the Google Search Widget The web2go screen can not be accessed via a Wi Fi connection Search the Internet To perform an internet search using keywords 1 From within the Google search application tap the Google search field enter the keyword s to search using the on screen keypad 2 Tap fey A list of search results displays 3 Tapa link to view the website Connections 189 Adding and Deleting Windows You can have up to eight Internet windows
283. re are often but not always clearly marked They include below deck on boats chemical transfer or storage facilities vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas such as propane or butane areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain dust or metal powders and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine When your Device is Wet Do not turn on your device if it is wet If your device is already on turn it off and remove the battery immediately if the device will 264 not turn off or you cannot remove the battery leave it as is Then dry the device with a towel and take it to a service center FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC Regulations for Wireless Devices The U S Federal Communications Commission FCC has established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive hearing devices When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices hearing aids and cochlear implants use wireless mobile devices they may detect a buzzing humming or whining noise Some hearing devices are more immune than others to this interference noise and mobile devices also vary in the amount of interference they generate The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their hearing devices Not all mobile
284. re available for the camera Note The options disappear after a few seconds Touch the screen to display the tab then touch the tab to view these options Focus area displays the area of the image used as the main focus area Self portrait allows you to set the front camera so you can take pictures of yourself or video chat Flash allows you to set the flash options to Off On or Auto flash Settings Edit shortcuts allows you to set shortcut icons for the settings that you use the most Self portrait allows you to set the front camera so you can take pictures of yourself or video chat Flash allows you to set the flash options to Off On or Auto flash Shooting mode allows you to set the shooting mode Options are e Single shot takes a single photo and view it before returning to the shooting mode e Smile shot the camera focuses on the face of your subject Once the camera detects the person s smile it takes the picture Multimedia 127 128 Settings continued Panorama takes a landscape photo by taking an initial photo and then adding additional images to itself The guide box lets you view the area where the second part of the panoramic picture should fall within Action shot detects action and creates a panorama of the moving object Cartoon gives your photo a cartoon look Scene mode allows you to set the Scene to help take the best pictures possible Options include None Portr
285. reate creates a new Event e Go to displays a specific date e Today displays the date highlighted with a Blue box highlighting the date e Search allows you to search within current events Delete allows you to delete All events All events before today or an individual event e Settings displays a list of configurable settings For more information refer to Synchronizing Contacts on page 100 To manually sync calendar events 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP gt Accounts and sync 2 Locate the email account containing the events you wish to synchronize 3 Tap oe within the adjacent account field to reveal the account s synchronization settings screen 4 Tap Sync Calendar to activate the synchronization of calendar events between your device and the remote exchange server A green checkmark indicates the feature is enabled Contacts The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts List is your phone s built in memory For more information refer to Contacts List on page 89 Camera Use your 5 0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a JPEG format The Camcorder shoots High Definition video in an MP4 format Note An SD card must be inserted before the Camera will take and store photos p From the Home screen tap td Applications gt Camera For more information refer to Using the Camera on page 126 Clocks Here you can set an al
286. recautions for Transfer and Disposal If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the standard methods the data only appears to be removed on a superficial level and it may be possible for someone to retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this sort it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsung s Customer Care Center for an Extended File System EFS Clear which will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to default settings Please contact the Samsung Customer Care Center for details Important Please provide warranty information proof of purchase to Samsung s Customer Care Center in order to provide this service at no charge If the warranty has expired on the device charges may apply Samsung Telecommunications America LLC 1301 E Lookout Drive Richardson Texas 75082 Phone 1 800 SAMSUNG Phone 1 888 987 HELP 4357 9012 Samsung Telecommunications America LLC All rights reserved 272 No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written approval Specifications and availability subject to change without notice 111611 End User License Agreement for Software IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and Samsung Electronics Co Ltd for software owned by Samsung Electronics C
287. reen tap 2 gt Touch and hold a group entry then select Edit group Make modifications to the Group name or Ringtone fields Tap Save Deleting a Caller Group 1 2 3 4 5 From the Home screen tap B gt Press E l and then tap Delete Select either Select all or tap the desired group ko Tap Delete Select either Group only or Group and group members Groups tab Groups tab Sending a Message to a Group From the Home screen tap BB gt 2 Groups 1 2 Groups tab Tap an existing group and press and then tap Send message or Touch and hold a group entry and select Send message Select the recipients of the new message indicated by a green checkmark If an entry contains multiple phone numbers each must be selected individually Tap Send Type your message and tap Send Contacts 105 The Favorites Tab The Favorites tab is a list of the phone numbers that have been designated as favorite contacts For more information refer to Logs Tab on page 73 1 From the Home screen tap A 2 Tap bef Favorites tab Favorites Adding a contact to your favorites list 3 From within the Favorites tab press and select Add to favorites 4 Place a check mark alongside those current Contacts entries you wish to assign as favorites 5 Tap Add to complete the process 106 Section 7 Messages This section describes how to send or receive different types o
288. remely loud noises such Email nidedinfo nih gov as rock concerts that might cause temporary hearing loss Temporary Internet hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal http www nided nih gov e Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort If you en F National Institute for Occupational Safety and experience ringing in your ears hear muffled speech or experience Health NIOSH any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio device discontinue use and consult your doctor 395 E Street S W Suite 9200 a Patriots Plaza Building You can obtain additional information on this subject from the Washington DC 20201 following sources Voice 1 800 35 NIOSH 1 800 356 4674 1 800 CDC INFO 1 800 232 4636 American Academy of Audiology Outside the U S 513 533 8328 11730 Plaza American Drive Suite 300 Reston VA 20190 Email cdcinfo cdc gov _ Internet Melee 800 a 2336 http www cdc gow niosh topics noise Email info audiology org defaut hiril Internet http Avww audiology org Pages default aspx Te eae Te 262 Operating Environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is forbidden to use it or when it may cause interference or danger When connecting the mobile device or any accessory to another device read its user s guide for detailed safety instructions Do not co
289. request a particular service that involves e mail communications However you consent to us contacting you by e mail and sending you information about products and services which we believe may be of interest to you You may have the opportunity to subscribe to an electronic newsletter in which case information about the Service or our advertisers will be sent to your e mail address We will provide you with the option to change your preferences and opt out of receiving those communications You may request at any time that we not e mail you in future by clicking the unsubscribe link which is included at the bottom of any e mail that you receive from us If you unsubscribe we will make reasonable efforts to discontinue e mail communications to you as soon as practicable DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO THIRD PARTIES Aggregate Information Except as specifically set forth in this Privacy Policy we do not share your personal information with any third party without your permission We may disclose aggregate information such as demographic information and our statistical analyses to third parties including advertisers or other business partners This Warranty Information 285 aggregate information does not include your personal information Service Providers We sometimes engage unaffiliated businesses to assist us in providing you certain services For example we may use third parties to provide advertising marketing and promotiona
290. ress and hold fay then tap Task manager This screen contains the following tabs e Active applications display those currently active applications running on your phone e Downloaded displays any installed packages or applications from the Market that are taking up memory space Tap Uninstall to remove them from your phone e RAM displays the amount of current RAM Random Access Memory currently being used and allow you to Clear memory e Storage displays a visual graph indicating the available and used space within the System storage location USB storage and SD card location e Help provides additional battery saving techniques Shutting Down an Currently Active Application 1 From the Home screen tap cd Applications gt Task manager 2 From the Active applications tab tap Exit to close selected applications or tap Exit all to close all background running applications Getting Started 19 Section 2 Understanding Your Device This section outlines key features of your phone It also describes the phone s keys screen and the icons that display when the phone is in use Features of Your Phone Your phone is lightweight easy to use and offers many significant features The following list outlines a few of the features included in your phone e Touch screen with virtual on screen QWERTY keyboard e High Speed Packet Access Plus HSPA delivering data speeds faster than the current 3G network technology
291. rk and therefore airtime data charges and or additional charges may apply in accordance with your service plan Contact your wireless service provider for details Your Location Location based information includes information that can be used to determine the approximate location of a mobile device Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless network transmit location based information Additionally if you use applications that require location based information e g driving directions such applications transmit location based information The location based information may be shared with third parties including your wireless service provider applications providers Samsung and other third parties providing services Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls When you make an emergency call the cellular network may activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the emergency responders your approximate location AGPS has limitations and might not work in your area Therefore e Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of your ability and Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency responder instructs you Navigation Maps directions and other navigation data including data relating to your current location may contain inaccurate or incomplete data and circumstances can and do change over time In some areas complete information may not be available Therefore you should always visuall
292. rmation available from other sources including information received from our affiliates marketing companies or advertisers This Privacy Policy covers all such personal 284 information and will remain in full force and effect as long as you are a user of the Service even if your use of or participation in any particular service feature function or promotional activity terminates expires ceases is suspended or deactivated for any reason INFORMATION THAT WE COLLECT Personal Information We may request that you supply us with personal information such as your name e mail address mailing address home or work telephone number in the course of you accessing or using the Service such as via registration forms surveys and polls In each such case you will know what categories of information we collect because you will actively provide the information to us You may not be able to fully utilize all of the features or components of the Service if you choose not to provide certain information If you do choose to give us personal information through the Service we will collect and retain that information Non Personal Information When you use the Service we may also collect non personal information We consider non personal information to be information that by itself cannot be used to identify or contact you personally such as demographic information your age gender income education profession zip code etc Non
293. rnal storage and microSD card Opening and Navigating within Files DCIM is the default location for pictures or video taken by the device These files are actually stored in the DCIM folder location 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt Files 2 Tapa folder and scroll down or up until you locate your selected file e Up tab allows you to back up into a higher directory e Home tab allows you to back up to the root directory Press and then tap View as to change the way the files are displayed on screen Choose from List List and details or Thumbnail e Press for these additional options Share Create folder Delete View as Sort by and More Move Copy Rename and Settings 3 Once you have located your file tap the file name to launch the associated application The Gallery The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos For photos you can also perform basic editing tasks view a slideshow set photos as wallpaper or caller image and share as a picture message Note If the phone displays a memory full message when accessing the Gallery access Files and remove some of the media files from the folders and then open the Gallery Opening the Gallery p From the Home screen tap ae Applications gt D Gallery For more information refer to Camera Gallery Options on page 130 Note If you stored your files in folders directories on the storage card Gallery d
294. rovision and the Limited Warranty For any arbitration in which your total damage claims exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees are 5 000 00 or less Small Claim the arbitrator may if you prevail award your reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs as part of any award but may not grant SAMSUNG its attorney fees expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad faith In a Small Claim case you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative facility and arbitrator fees or 50 00 of such fees whichever is less and SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees Administrative facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees exceed 5 000 00 Large Claim shall be determined according to AAA rules In a Large Claim case the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party or apportion among the parties reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator s award in any court of competent jurisdiction This arbitration provision also applies to claims against SAMSUNG s employees representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from the Product s sale condition or performance You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days from the dat
295. s and click Submit Follow the password recovery procedure Voice Mail Setting Up Your Voice Mail Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls to voicemail even if your device is in use or turned off As soon as your battery is charged and the SIM card inserted activate your voicemail account Important Always use a password to protect against unauthorized access For new users follow the instructions below to set up voice mail Note Voicemail setup may be different depending on your network 1 From the Home screen tap Pe and then touch and hold the key until the device dials voice mail You may be prompted to enter a password 2 Follow the tutorial to create a password a greeting and a display name Accessing Your Voice Mail You can access your Voice Mail by either pressing and holding on the keypad or by using the phone s Application icon then tapping the Voice Mail application To access Voice Mail using the menu 1 From the Home screen tap ass and then touch and hold until the device dials voice mail Note Touching and holding will launch Visual voicemail if it is already active on your device 2 When connected follow the voice prompts from the voice mail center Getting Started 17 Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone 1 Dial your wireless phone number 2 When you hear your voicemail greeting press the asterisk key on the phone you are using 3 Enter your passcode Visual Voi
296. s mounted to a compatible docking station 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Dock 2 Tap Audio output mode to enable the use of external speakers when the device is docked Date and Time This menu allows you to change the current time and date displayed 1 Press fay gt and then tap Settings gt Date and time 2 Tap Automatic to allow the network set the date and time Important Deactivate Automatic to manually set the rest of the options 3 Tap Set date and use the plus or minus icons to set the Month Day and Year then tap Set 4 Tap Select time zone then tap a time zone 5 Tap Set time and use the plus or minus icons set Hour and Minute Tap PM or AM then tap Set e Optional Touch Use 24 hour format If this is not selected the phone automatically uses a 12 hour format 6 Tap Select date format and touch the date format type About Phone This menu contains legal information system tutorial information and other phone information such as the model number firmware version baseband version kernel version and software build number To access phone information p gt Press cay gt and then tap OP Settings gt About phone The following information displays e Status displays the battery status the level of the battery percentage the phone number for this device the network connection signal strength mobile network type service state roaming status mobile ne
297. s or claims whether in advertising presentations or otherwise on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited Warranty This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state What is the procedure for resolving disputes ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE CONDITION OR PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with a dispute involving any other person s or entity s Product or claim and specifically without limitation of the foregoing shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class action The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator whose award may not exceed in form or amount the relief allowed by the applicable law The arbitration shall be conducted according to the American Arbitration Association AAA Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act The laws of the State of Texas without reference to its choice of laws principles shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision The arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this arbitration p
298. s tab 2 Tap an entry to view available options Note The Logs tab only records calls that occur while the phone is turned on If a call is received while it is turned off it will not be included in your calling history Each entry contains the phone number if it is available and Contacts entry name if the number is in your Contacts Indicates all outgoing calls made from your device Indicates any received calls that were answered Indicates any received calls that were rejected Indicates a missed call K ang Call Functions and Contacts List 73 Accessing Logs from The Notifications Area 1 Locate from the Notifications area of the Status bar 2 Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel 1 3 Tap the Missed call entry to open the Logs screen 2 Tip Press and tap Notifications to open the panel This list provides easy access to redial an entry or you can also choose to access two types of history entry lists depending on how they are touched 74 Call Logs Caller Overview Call options tap Call Log screen Call 13333333333 Send message Edit number before call Send log info Entry specific context menu touch and hold View contact Add to reject list e Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the Call options screen Call allows you to redial the entry
299. s when you receive an important email Your phone s Email application lets you access and manage multiple email accounts simultaneously in one convenient location There are currently three main types of email accounts on your phone Gmail Internet based email Gmail Yahoo etc and Microsoft Exchange Corporate email or Outlook To send and receive email messages through an ISP Internet Service Provider account or if you wish to use your device to access your corporate email through a VPN Virtual Private Network you will first need to set up an IMAP or POP account e IMAP Internet Message Access Protocol This protocol is frequently used in large networks and commercial settings IMAP4 is the current standard e POP3 Post Office Protocol This protocol is supported by most ISPs Internet service providers and common among consumer applications POP3 is the current standard e Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync This protocol is frequently used with a large corporate email server system and provides access to email contact and calendar synchronization Creating an Internet Email Account 1 From the Home screen tap i Applications gt Email 2 If you already have other email account setup e Tap the account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page e Press and then tap Add account Account name Inbox 20 Educators Save on 3 07 AM Messages 115
300. sages from the network e Service loading allows you to set the type of service loading notification Choose from Always Prompt or Never Notification settings e Notifications allows you to see message notifications on your status bar e Select ringtone allows you to set the ringtone for your message notifications e Vibrate allows you to assign a vibration setting for message notifications Choose from Always Only in Silent mode or Never CMAS message settings CMAS alerts allows you to configure emergency alert settings You can enable disable those alert categories you wish to receive Choose from Imminent Extreme alert Imminent Severe alert AMBER alert Note The Presidential alert can not be disabled Messages 113 Emergency Alert Configuration This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network PLAN If your wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS PLAN alerts are available while in the provider s coverage area If you travel outside your provider s coverage area wireless emergency alerts may not be available For more information please contact your wireless provider Emergency Alerts allows customers to receive geographically targeted messages Alert messages are provided by the US Department of Homeland Security and will alert customers of imminent threats t
301. scounts and deals right to your phone by providing some brief customer and location information The application uses your current location to bring you the best deals in your area 170 Initial Setup 1 3 From the Home screen tap gi More for Me Read the on screen information and configure the necessary options such as Gender Age and agreements Applications gt Tap Continue to complete the setup process Using the More for Me Application 1 From the Home screen tap ig More for Me Access an available tab for more options Applications gt e Just for Me displays a listing of current offers available within your current area e All Deals Provides you with common categories to choose from such as Food amp Drinks Health amp Beauty Retail amp Service Activities Events Other and All nearby My Deals displays a list of previously redeemed offers e Settings Provides access to configuration settings such as Get Better Deals Connect with Facebook and Terms amp Conditions Music Google Music Also known as Google Music allows you to browse shop and playback songs purchased from the Android Market The music you choose is automatically stored in your Google Music library and instantly ready to play or download p From the Home screen tap Applications gt a Music For more information refer to Music Google Music on page 143 Music This applicatio
302. screen and six Extended screens e Settings Op provides quick access to the device s settings menu The Settings menu can also be accessed by pressing and then tapping gt Settings Back Key The Back key gt returns you to the previously active screen If the on screen keyboard is currently open this key closes the keyboard Search Key The Search key Qh displays the Google Search box that can be used to search for either a key term both on the phone and online In some instances this key opens a search box specific only to the current application 1 Press Press Aa and tap tg gt B to launch the Google Search box 2 From the on screen keyboard tap 4 top of screen to launch the Google Voice Search function P gt Search Search 0 Field ia Search Options All Web Apps Contacts T Mobile Name ID Application Go to Settings Search Results Using Google Search Use the Google Search box to manually search for a term on both your device and on the Web 1 2 Press to launch the Google Search box Tap Ky to select a search area e All searches your device the Web and the Android Market for your search term e Web searches for your term only on the Web using the Google search engine e Apps searches for your term only within the Android Market e Contacts searches for your term only within your current Contacts entries e Settings configures the it
303. se the connector cable 1 Press fay gt and then tap Settings gt Call gt TTY mode 2 Tap Full TTY to activate the feature or TTY mode off to deactivate the feature Off is the default setting HAC Mode This menu is used to activate or deactivate Hearing Aid Compatibility for this device 1 Press fay gt and then tap KY Settings gt Call 2 Tap the Hearing aids field to activate the feature green check mark or tap it again to deactivate the feature Off is the default setting Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Call gt Additional settings 2 Tap one of the following options e Caller ID chooses whether your number is displayed when someone answers your outgoing call Choose from Network default Hide number or Show number e Call barring blocks specific types of calls All outgoing calls International calls etc e Call waiting notifies you of an incoming call while you are on another call e Auto redial automatically redial the dialed number if it is unable to connect or the call is cut off e Fixed Dialing Numbers see description below Fixed Dialing Numbers Fixed Dial Number FDN allows you to restrict outgoing calls to a limited set of phone numbers Enabling FDN 1 Press cay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Call gt Additional settings gt Fixed Dialing Numbers 2 Tap Enable FDN 3 At the prom
304. send contact information e Merge with Google allows you to merge all of your current Contact Options include Save new contacts to Service numbers and Send entries with your active Google Gmail account If several of your contact contacts are from other sources such as Corporate email Internet email Facebook etc this allows you to back them up or copy them to your Gmail account Tap Merge to continue or Cancel to exit More Import Export imports or exports contacts to or from the SIM card or SD card you can also send namecards via methods such as Bluetooth Email Gmail or Messaging View friends allows you to view only those Contact entries that have been added from Social Networking Sites SNS such as Facebook 94 Contact Menu Options 1 2 From the Home screen tap a Touch and hold an entry to reveal the context menu The following options display e Edit allows you to edit the currently selected Contacts entry e Delete allows you to delete the currently selected Contacts entry e Join contact allows you to link the current contact to another current contact Similar to a see also feature If you can t remember a contact s information linking entries can help you find the person you are looking for e Send contact information allows you to send the current entry info via text message e Add to favorites allows you to copy the current Contacts entry to the list within
305. ses or other software problems introduced into the Product or j Product used or purchased outside the United States This Limited Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80 of rated capacity or the battery leaks and this Limited Warranty does not cover any battery if i the battery has been charged by a battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery ii any of the seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering or iii the battery has been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for which it is specified What are SAMSUNG s obligations During the applicable warranty period provided the Product is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited Warranty SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product at SAMSUNG s sole option without charge SAMSUNG may at SAMSUNG s sole option use rebuilt reconditioned or new parts or components when repairing any Product or may replace the Product with a rebuilt reconditioned or new Product Repaired replaced cases pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of ninety 90 days All other repaired replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original Product or for ninety 90 days whichever is longer All replaced Products parts components boards and equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG Except to any extent expressly
306. sh chemicals cleaning solvents or strong detergents to clean the mobile device Wipe it with a soft cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap and water solution Shock or vibration Do not drop knock or shake the mobile device Rough handling can break internal circuit boards Paint Do not paint the mobile device Paint can clog the device s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper operation Responsible Listening Caution Avoid potential hearing loss Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud sounds over time The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is played louder and for longer durations Prolonged exposure to loud sounds including music is the most common cause of preventable hearing loss Some scientific research suggests that using portable audio devices such as portable music players and Cell phones at high volume settings for long durations may lead to permanent noise induced hearing loss This includes the use of headphones including headsets earbuds and Bluetooth or other wireless devices Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus a ringing in the ear hypersensitivity to sound and distorted hearing Individual susceptibility to noise induced hearing loss and potential hearing problem varies Additionally the amount of sound produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the sound the device settings and
307. sign call alert tones and activate call alerts and vibration Answer vibration vibrates the phone when the called party answers Call status tones assigns sounds settings during the call Choose from Call connect tone Minute minder and Call end tone Alerts on call selects whether alarm and message notification is tumed off during a call e Call answering ending allows you to manage the settings for answering and ending calls Answering key allows you to press a key to answer the phone Automatic answering when connected automatically answers a call via the headset after a period of time Selections are Off after 1 second after 2 seconds after 3 seconds after 4 seconds or after 5 seconds The power key ends calls allows you to press the power key to end the current call e Turn on proximity sensor allows you to turn off the LCD when the phone is near your face during a call so you do not accidentally tap a key e Call forwarding configures call forwarding options e TTY mode allows you to configure the TTY settings For more information refer to TTY Mode on page 220 Changing Your Settings 219 e Hearing aids allows you to enable disable hearing aid compatibility For more information refer to HAC Mode on page 221 Additional settings allows you to configure additional call settings For more information refer to Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 22
308. splays company logos on a layer of Google Maps When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business or person find out more information about the business see coupons public responses and more For more information refer to Places on page 177 Polaris Office Polaris Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office compatible office suite This application provides a central place for managing your documents online or offline For more information refer to Polaris Office on page 177 Pro Apps Provides access to compatible productivity tools For more information refer to Pro Apps on page 178 Oo a z 4 Gio Settings Accesses the device s built in Settings menu For more information refer to Changing Your Settings on page 210 Slacker Slacker offers free internet radio for mobile phones For more information refer to Slacker on page 178 Social Hub Allows you to easily and intuitively satisfy all of your communication needs from within a single user interface E mails instant messaging social network contents and calendar contents from all major service providers are available For more information refer to Social Hub on page 179 T Mobile Mall This downloadable application provides access to several phone features and tunes For more information refer to T Mobile Mall on page 179 T Mobile Name ID Allows you to modify the on screen Ca
309. ss and hold Tap Touch and hold T Mobile e Press and hold Pressing relates to use of the hardware keys and buttons to select or activate an item For example press the Navigation key to scroll through a menu Some buttons and keys require you to press and hold them to activate a feature for example you press the Lock key to lock and unlock the phone e Tap Use a brief touch to select items on the display or to enter text on the virtual QWERTY keyboard For example touch an Application icon to open the application A light touch works best e Touch and hold Touch and hold an icon or key to open the available options or to access a pop up menu For example press and hold from the Home screen to access a menu of customization options e Flick Move your finger in lighter quicker strokes than swiping This finger gesture is always used in a vertical motion such as when flicking through contacts or a message list e Swipe or slide Quickly drag your finger vertically or horizontally across the screen This allows you to move the area of focus or to scroll through a list For example slide your finger left or right on the Home screen to scroll among the seven panels e Drag Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start to move it Do not release your finger until you have reached the target position Understanding Your Device 35 e Pinch Pinch the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom Mot
310. sten to music using 5 1 Virtual Surround Sound Plays the entire song list once Replays the current list when the list ends Repeats the currently playing song shuffles the current list of songs randomly THEE Ba amp B Baa songs play in order and are not shuffled lists the current playlist songs Il a 148 Music Player Options The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set preferences for the music player such as whether you want the music to play in the background sound effects and how the music menu displays p With the music player application displayed and a song currently playing press and select one of the following options e Add to quick list adds the selected music file to a quick playlist e Via Bluetooth plays the music through a Bluetooth stereo headset Share music via shares a music file via AllShare Bluetooth Email Gmail Messaging or Wi Fi e Setas sets this song as a Phone ringtone Caller ringtone or Alarm tone e Add to playlist adds a song to the playlist More Settings allows you to activate or deactivate the Equalizer Sound effect or Music menu The Music menus allow you to decide what you want to display Selections are Albums Artists Genres Folders Composers Years Most played Recently played or Recently added Touch each item that you want to display in the Music menu Details displays details about the selected music Stop playing m
311. stthe ISO for each of your shots Metering allows you to set how the camera measures or meters the light source Centre weighted Spot or Matrix Guidelines allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off Image quality allows you to set the image quality to Superfine Fine or Normal GPS tag allows you to turn GPS On or Off also known as Geotagging The location of where the picture is taken is attached to the picture Only available in Camera mode Shutter sound allows you to set the Shutter sound to On or Off a NZ Storage allows you to configure the default storage location for images or videos as either Phone or Memory card if inserted Reset allows you to resetall camera or camcorder settings to the default values Camera Camcorder Mode allows you to take a photo in various modes Once you change the mode the corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the display Slide the button up for Camera or down for Camcorder Camera button takes a photo when pressed in Camera mode Image viewer allows you to access the Image viewer and the various viewing options for a selected picture The last picture you took will be displayed as a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon Multimedia 129 Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options After you take a photo or record a video you can access various options Photo options e Share allows you to share a picture using AllShare Social Hub Pho
312. t For more information refer to Installing the microSD Memory Card on page 9 2 Verify the card is properly mounted 54 Configure the phone for USB mass storage mode connection e Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt USB utilities gt Connect storage to PC For more information refer to USB Utilities on page 214 Connect the USB cable to the phone and connect the cable to the computer Tap Connect USB storage Both the phone and computer display icons to show that the device is mounted As soon as the connection is established a drive letter is assigned to the phone s storage device Later tap Disconnect storage from PC to close the USB connection between the phone and your computer Unmounting the SD card Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to the SD card while removing it from the slot 1 Press ay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Storage 2 Tap Unmount SD card 3 When the SD card will be unmounted message displays and the Mount SD card now appears in the menu list remove the SD card SD card Memory Status To view the memory allocation for your external SD card p gt Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Storage The available memory displays under the Total space and Available space headings Erasing Files from the SD card You can erase files from the SD card using the phone 1 Ensure the SD card is mounted
313. t is at this level that the automatic power saving function will kick in Tap OK to store the new battery level To activate additional power saving features 1 2 Activate Power saving mode Tap any of the available fields to activate additional power saving parameters Choose from e Turn off Wi Fi to disable Wi Fi when it is not connected to an AP e Tum off Bluetooth to disable Bluetooth when not in use or actively transmitting data Turn off GPS to disable the GPS location system when not in use e Tum off Sync to disable the feature when the phone is not synchronizing with the server e Brightness to activate deactivate the Brightness adjustment feature Once enable the following Brightness adjustment field is accessible e Brightness to assign the brightness level of the screen For more information refer to Adjusting Screen Brightness on page 226 e Screen timeout to adjust the time delay before the screen turns off e Power saving tips to display additional on screen power saving information Changing Your Settings 227 Location and Security This menu allows you to configure phone location and security settings Using Wireless Networks Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest you must enable the Use wireless networks option or enable the GPS satellites 1 Press ay gt and then tap Settings gt Location and sec
314. t on your current screen To remove a Widget 1 Touch and hold a Widget until it unlocks from the current screen Drag the widget over the Remove tab mn and release it e As you place the Widget into the Trash both items turn red e This action doesn t delete the Widget it just removes it from the current screen To place a widget onto a different screen 1 2 Touch and hold the widget until it becomes transparent Slowly drag it past the edge of the screen until the adjacent page appears highlighted and it then snaps onto the new page Drag the widget to its desired position on the new screen Repeat these steps to continue moving it to other screens Creating and Managing a Folder Folders hold items that you want to organize and store together on the workspace To create a new on screen folder 1 PF YS DN Press ay to go to the Home screen Touch and hold an empty area of the screen From the Add to Home window tap Folders Tap an available folder type and place it on the current screen Renaming a folder 1 Tap the desired folder you want to rename This opens its contents on an on screen popup window With the folder open touch and hold the grey Folder title bar top of the Folder window until the Rename folder pop up displays Enter a new title for this folder and tap OK Understanding Your Device 51 Deleting a folder 1 Touch and hold a desired folder This un
315. tap OP Settings gt Sound 2 Tap Vibration and select a vibration mode Choose from Always Never Only in Silent mode or Only when not in Silent mode Note The Phone vibrate setting is independent of other call sounds settings For example if you have Silent mode enabled along with Phone vibrate your phone won t play a ringtone but will vibrate for an incoming call Note Use both the Silent mode and enable the Only when not in Silent mode option to guarantee no vibrations or sounds from your phone Changing Your Settings 223 Adjusting the Volume Settings The Volume menu now provides access to various volume settings within one on screen popup menu 1 Press cay gt and then tap Keys Settings gt Sound gt Volume 2 Touch and drag the on screen slider to assign the volume settings for any of the following volume levels e Incoming call Media System or Notification 3 Tap OK to assign the volume levels Adjusting the Vibration Intensity Settings This menu allows you to adjust vibration settings for various categories within one on screen popup menu 1 Press fay gt and then tap sO Settings gt Sound gt Vibration intensity 2 Touch and drag the on screen slider to assign the levels for any of the following vibration levels e Incoming call Notification or Haptic feedback 3 Tap OK to assign the new levels 224 Setup the Voice Call Ringtone 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Set
316. text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard 2 With Swype as your text entry method select one of the following text mode options e ABC to use Swype with alphanumeric characters from the on screen keyboard SYM Symbol Ea to enter numbers and symbols from the on screen keyboard Note After typing an initial uppercase charac er the t key changes to and all letters that follow are in lower case Swype Keyboard Overview e Recipients a field where you can enter the recipients of the current message You can choose from Contacts Recent Group or Favorites e Text Input field a field where text be entered number or other characters can e CAPS ALT key When in ABC mode this key changes the capitalization of the subsequent en fered characters When in SYM mode this key can show additional symbol characters e Text Input mode There are two available modes ABC and SYM 80 ABC mode contains alphanumeric characters and a few common punctuation marks Text mode button indicates 123 SYM mode contains only symbols and numbers Text mode button indicates EditABC SWYPE tips Tapping this button displays the Swype tips and tutorial screen Recipients Text input field CAPS ALT key SWYPE Tips qa rtyuiop agdfghjkl Text Input mode Voice actions Current Mode Delete Using 123ABC Mode in Swype In EditABC mode you can enter only
317. the Home screen touch and hold an empty area until the Add to Home menu displays 2 Tap Widgets gt Power savings The Power Control shortcut is added to the current screen 14 3 Tap any of the icons on the Power Savings shortcut bar to activate deactivate the feature Note A green bar displayed beneath the icon means the application is active turned on The green bar is removed from beneath the icon when the feature is deactivated turned off Initial Device Configuration 1 Tap the on screen Android icon to begin the setup process On this screen you can either use the device for an Emergency dial or Change the language 2 Tap Skip to ignore the Google Account setup process Note At this point you can either create a new Google account or sign in using your existing account information 3 Select deselect the desired Google location services and tap Next Note Enabling Google location services can drain battery power For more information refer to Power Savings on page 14 4 Press and hold O until the Phone options screen appears 5 Tap Power off 0 Switching the Device On or Off If you have not already configured your device after an initial firmware update you will be prompted with a series of configuration screens Once the device has been configured you will not be prompted with these screens again Important Before the initial configuration you quickly access emergency serv
318. the cache or data 3 Tap Force stop Clear data Clear cache or Clear defaults Uninstalling third party applications You can uninstall any application you downloaded and installed from Android Market 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Applications gt Manage applications 2 Tap the third party application and from the Application info screen tap Uninstall Media Hub p From the Home screen tap td Applications gt w Media Hub For more information refer to Media Hub on page 140 Memo This feature allows you to create a memo 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt Utility gt F _ Memo 2 Tap Create memo Note If this is your first memo you are automatically taken to the new memo screen 3 Compose the memo 4 Tap Save For more information refer to Text Input Methods on page 77 Memo options 1 While viewing the list of Memos press and select one of the following options e Create allows you to create a memo e Delete allows you to delete one or more memos e Search allows you to search within the current set of memos e Send allows you to send one or several of your memos at one time Select a memo and tap send to deliver it via Bluetooth Email Messaging or Wi Fi e Sort by allows you to sort by Date or Color e More provides the following options SNS log in allows you to log into your Facebook Twitter or Linkedin accounts
319. the device similar to a soda can 3 Slide the cover away from the phone 3 Release Latch Getting Started 7 To replace the battery cover 1 Position the battery cover over the battery compartment 2 Align and insert the tabs along the top edge of the cover into their corresponding Cover slots 1 located at either sides of the rear camera area 3 Press and snap the cover onto the device 2 Make sure to securely snap it down onto the device all the way around the battery cover Cover slots SIM Card Overview Important Before removing or replacing the battery cover make sure the phone is switched off To turn the phone off hold down the Qo key until the power off image displays then tap Power off The SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as your telephone number PIN available optional services and many other features Important The SIM card and its information can be easily damaged by scratching or bending so be careful when handling inserting or removing the card Keep all SIM cards out of reach of small children Some features on your device such as Wi Fi Calling can be unlocked by using a new ISIM IP Multimedia Services Identity Module card To use this new ISIM card call or contact T Mobile customer service for more information This card contains the necessary information for identifying and authenticating the user to the IMS IP Multimedia Subsystem If availa
320. the headphones that are used As a result there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of sound settings and equipment You should follow some common sense recommendations when using any portable audio device e Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an audio source e Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at which you can hear adequately Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing When using headphones turn the volume down if you cannot hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear what you are listening to e Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings If you choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment use Health and Safety Information 261 noise cancelling headphones to block out background environmental noise By blocking background environment noise noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than when using earbuds e Limit the amount of time you listen As the volume increases less time is required before you hearing could be affected National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders National Institutes of Health 31 Center Drive MSC 2320 Bethesda MD 20892 2320 e Avoid using headphones after exposure to ext
321. ther party accrued prior to termination Clauses 2 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 3 8 9 and 10 of this License will continue to be enforceable notwithstanding termination 8 GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION 8 1 The formation existence construction performance validity and all aspects whatsoever of this License or of any term of this License will be governed by the laws of the State of New York 8 2 The courts in New York City will have non exclusive jurisdiction to settle any disputes which may arise out of or in connection with this License The parties irrevocably agree to submit to that jurisdiction 9 COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE LAW You acknowledge and agree that notwithstanding the fact that this License is governed by the laws of the Republic of Korea you may be subject to additional laws in other jurisdictions with respect to your use of the Software You will comply with the laws of any jurisdiction that apply to the Software including without limitation any applicable export laws or regulations Warranty Information 291 10 GENERAL 10 1 If any clause or part of this License is found by any court tribunal administrative body or authority of competent jurisdiction to be illegal invalid or unenforceable then that provision will to the extent required be severed from this License and will be ineffective without as far as is possible modifying any other clause or part of this License and this will not affect any other provisi
322. ther you or Samsung some traces of the Material may remain and copies of the Material may still reside within the servers used in providing the Service However Samsung does not claim ownership in your Material You represent and warrant that you have obtained any consents permission or licenses that may be required for you to have the legal right to submit any Material Samsung reserves the right to terminate your access to the Service if Samsung determines at its sole discretion that you have repeatedly submitted infringing Materials to the Service Using the Service You agree to e Use the Service only for your private non commercial purposes e Comply with applicable laws the Terms and good manners e Not submit unlawful offensive abusive pornographic harassing libelous or other inappropriate Material e Respect the privacy of others e Obtain any consents permission or licenses that may be required for you to have the legal right to submit any Material and e Not distribute or post spam unreasonably large files chain letters pyramid schemes viruses or any other technologies that may harm the Service or the interest or property of the Service users Unauthorized use of the Service including any use in contravention of the Terms is prohibited and may result in criminal prosecution and or civil liability Restrictions You and any third party directed by You must not display copy store modify sell publish
323. this 8 or 10 digit number down 2 Verify you have the latest DivX software running on your computer Download the free player for your computer from www divx com 3 Open the DivX Player on your computer and from Login within the VOD menu Create a DivX Account select Register a DivX Register a DivX Certified Device Certified Device Register This Computer Manage My Computers and Devic Forgotten Password You are prompted to log in or create a DivX account if your account information has not already been saved in DivX Player Follow the instructions in DivX Player to enter the registration code from step 2 and create a device nickname ex Pat or Pat s Device hos mamat Geareiiad na piap year desica e ragarsatin wine yous Bret C cn ghey DIEA OW ROD Cotes basais zwar he Hagetatice rode u typist Inatadin your rade whip rara pou we nae to beata ect area tw Se Sn nen Fc A Select a location on your computer to download the DivX registration video with the same title as your device nickname ex Pat divx Derea name rol Conme a some for pour deson me yo cn puny reog A Ne eami Ugao ra cem Follow the on screen instructions to download the file and initiate the transfer process You will need to place this video file onto your device and play it back 10 11 12 Connect your device to the computer via USB and transfer this video For more information refer
324. tings gt Sound 2 Tap Phone ringtone 3 Tap a ringtone from the available list The ringtone briefly plays when selected 4 Tap OK to assign a ringer Setting a Notification Ringtone 1 Press fay gt and then tap Settings gt Sound gt Notification ringtone 2 Tap one of the ringtones and tap OK Audible Tone Settings The Audible touch tones and Audible selection options are used when you use the dialing pad or making a screen selection Each time you press a key or make a selection the selected tone sounds 1 Press fay gt and then tap sO Settings gt Sound 2 Tap Audible touch tones or Audible selection A check mark displayed next to these features indicates active status Screen Lock Sounds The screen lock sounds option is used to activate deactivate sounds when locking and unlocking the screen 1 Press cay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Sound 2 Tap Screen lock sounds A check mark displayed next to these features indicates active status Haptic Feedback Instead of sounding a tone the Haptic feedback option vibrates when you press soft keys on certain screens You can also set the intensity of the vibration using the Vibration intensity setting 1 Press ay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Sound 2 Tap Haptic feedback A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates Haptic feedback is active Display Settings In this menu you can change various settings fo
325. tion also describes the predictive text entry system that reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering text Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that can tell if the phone is being held in an upright Portrait or sideways Landscape orientation This is useful when entering text Your phone also provides several on screen keypad text entry options to make the task of text entry that much easier Text Input Methods There are two text input methods available e Samsung keypad an on screen QWERTY keypad that can be used in both portrait and landscape orientation e Swype default a new way to enter text on touch screens Instead of tapping each key use your finger to trace over each letter of a word The on screen QWERTY keypad works the same in both portrait and landscape mode Selecting the Text Input Method The Text Input Method can be assigned from within one of two locations Settings Menu p gt Press ay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Language and keyboard gt Select input method Text Input field 1 From a screen where you can enter text touch and hold the text input field to open the context menu 2 Select the input method Samsung keypad or Swype Select input method Samsung keypad C Swype w Default Text Input Method Entering Text 77 Entering Text Using Swype Swype is the default text input method that allows you to enter a word by sliding y
326. to Premium the application or use Memory currently being used and allow you to Clear memory e Storage displays a visual graph indicating the available and used f space within the System storage location USB storage and 5 Use the available on screen functions SD card location Utility Help provides additional battery saving techniques 7 From the Active applications tab tap Exit to close selected the Use Basic Navigation This application houses some of the most commonly used utility applications such as Calculator Memo Minidiary Task Videos applications or tap Exit all to close all background running and Voice Recorder applications 1 From the Home screen tap id Applications gt TeleNav GPS Navigator EE utitity TeleNav GPS Navigator is a driving aid that uses both audible and 2 Tap an available application to begin its use visual directions for GPS navigation 3 Refer to the particular application s instructions for more 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt information Q TeleNav GPS Navigator Memo For more information refer to Memo on page 167 2 If prompted read the GPS Settings notification tap GPS e Task For more information refer to Task on page 182 Settings button and follow the on screen prompts to Videos For more information refer to Videos on page 184 enable the necessary GPS location feature e Voice command For more information refer to Voice 3 R
327. to editor Messaging Picasa Wi Fi Bluetooth Gmail Email Kodak or Snapfish e Delete allows you to delete the current picture Tap OK to delete or Cancel More provides additional options For more information refer to Camera Image Options on page 131 Video options e Play allows you to playback the current video file Share allows you to share a video using AllShare Messaging YouTube Wi Fi Bluetooth Gmail Email Kodak and Snapfish e Delete allows you to delete the current video More provides additional options Play allows you to replay the current video file Rename allows you to rename one or more video files 130 Camera Gallery Options The Gallery is where you can access the Gallery of stored camera images 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt D Gallery 7 2 Select a folder location ex Camera and select an image by tapping it once to place a green check mark on the file 3 Press from this main Gallery screen to reveal gallery specific options Send via Delete and More Camera Image Options When you take a picture the file is saved in the Photo folder You can view your pictures immediately or view them anytime in the Photo folder 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt z Gallery 2 Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the Image viewer Touch and drag a picture to the left to see the next picture or to the right to se
328. to record an audio file 3 Tap Stop to stop recording The file automatically saves to the Voice list 4 From the Recorded files page press and then tap Share and select a method in which to share this audio file Selections are Messaging Wi Fi Bluetooth Gmail or Email Refer to each specific section depending on the method you selected to send this voice recording Voice Search The Voice Search feature is a voice activated application that allows you to tell the phone what to search for and then the phone activates a Google search based on what you said For more information refer to Using Additional Voice Search Functions on page 32 1 From the Home screen tap Voice Search 2 Tap Speak now and then speak your search command Applications gt slowly and clearly Google searches for the information and displays related information in the browser Voice Talk Launches your phone s built in voice recognition system that allows you to initiate several common tasks without having to touch the phone Features include Call Text Navigate Play music Memo and Driving mode p From the Home screen tap 2 Woice ta For more information refer to Using Voice Talk on page 61 Applications gt Web Open the browser to start surfing the web The browser is fully optimized and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone p From the Home s
329. together to indicate how usable they are together For example if a hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless mobile device meets the M3 level rating the sum of the two values equals M5 Under the standard this should provide the hearing aid user with normal use while using the hearing aid with the particular wireless mobile device A sum of 6 or more would indicate excellent performance However these are not guarantees that all users will be satisfied T ratings work similarly The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the American National Standards Institute ANSI C63 19 standard Health and Safety Information 265 HAC for Newer Technologies This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses However there may be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids It is important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly and in different locations using your hearing aid or cochlear implant to determine if you hear any interfering noise Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility If you have questions about return or exchange policies consult your service provider or phone retailer Restricting Children s Access to Your Mobile Device Your mobile device is not a toy Do not allow children t
330. tos using the Photo editor application on your phone For more information refer to Photo Editor on page 135 Using the Camcorder In addition to taking photos the camera also doubles as a camcorder that also allows you to record view and send high definition videos Note To ensure the Camcorder can record the video use an SDHC memory card Shooting Video Tip When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions it is recommended that you provide your subject with sufficient light by having the light source behind you 1 From the Home screen tap Camera to activate the camera mode Tap and slide the Camera mode button down to Camcorder Mode Using the phone s main display screen as a viewfinder adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the subject Tap the Video key to begin shooting video The red light will blink while recording Tap the Video key again to stop the recording and save the video file to your Camera folder Once the file has been saved tap the image viewer then gt 0 play your video for review tap Press to return to the viewer Camcorder Options You can change options using your keypad in capture mode The following short cuts are available Recording mode allows you to set the recording mode to Normal which is limited only by available space on the destination location Limit for MMS which is limited by MMS size restrictions and Se
331. ts Sync Calendar or Sync Tasks fields to force the device to manually resync either the exchange Contacts or Calendar entries or Tap Account settings and specify any other email settings you wish to synchronize Messages 121 122 e Account name displays the name used by the device to track the account e Add signature activates the email signature feature e Signature allows you to create an outgoing email signature attached to new email messages sent from your phone Default account assigns this account as the default used when sending out new email messages e Always Cc Bcc myself allows you to include your own email address in either the CC Bec or None fields Lets you always receive a copy of outgoing emails e Period to sync email to assign the sync range for your incoming and outgoing email messages between your phone and your external exchange server How many days worth of email messages should the phone and server synchronize Choose from All 1 day 3 days 1 week 2 weeks or 1 month e Empty server trash allows you to delete your email account s trash bin remotely Sync schedule allows you to configure your email sync schedule Out of office settings allows you to both activate deactivate your email s out of office settings and configure both the start end dates and your outgoing message e Period to sync Calendar assigns a period for your phone to sync calendar events Choose from 2 weeks 1 month
332. ts list or create a Memo Viewing the Contacts List During a call you can look up a number in the Contacts list 1 Press and then tap Contacts 2 Browse the Contacts list for the information you need 3 Press to return to the active call Creating a Memo During a Call During a call it may be necessary to record information a Note 1 Press and then tap Memo 2 Use the keyboard to enter the note then tap Save e If desired press and select a new memo background color before saving Multi Party calls Making a Multi Party Call A multi party call is a network service that allows up to six people to participate in a multi party or conference call For further details about subscribing to this service contact T Mobile customer service Setting up a Multi Party Call 1 From the Home screen tap i 2 Dial the number for the first participant and tap AAI 3 Tap Add call enter the second phone number and tap nia The first caller is placed on hold 4 Wait for the second caller to answer the incoming call and tap Merge The two calls are now joined into a multi party call and display in the order in which they were called Important A maximum of two callers can be joined to a single multi party line Additional callers participate in a new Multiparty session and are held in conjunction with the previous multiparty call You can swap or place each multi party call on hold Having a Private Conversation With One Parti
333. ts to activate this option A check mark indicates selection 9 Tap Lock time zone to lock event time based on your current user selected time zone Select a time zone from within the Select time zone field 10 Tap Set alerts amp notifications to adjust the event notification method Choose from Alert Status bar notification and Off 11 Tap Vibration to activate this notification option Selections are Always Only in Silent mode or Never 12 Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar event notification 13 Tap Calendar sync and select the type of general synchronization settings you want A check mark indicates selection Clock This feature allows you to create an alarm to ring at a specified time track time in other parts of the world use a stopwatch or set a timer p From the Home screen tap Applications gt Clock Setting an Alarm 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Clock 2 Tap Create alarm 3 Use the plus or minus symbols to enter the hour and minutes then tap AM or PM toggles depending on which was last selected 4 Tap the Alarm repeat field and touch the number of times you want this alarm to repeat Selections are One time event Daily Every weekday Mon Fri or Weekly If you selected Weekly a button row displays Tap each day of the week in which you want this alarm to repeat then tap Save Time Management 207 208 Tap the Alarm type
334. ttingProducts RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures HomeBusinessandEntertainment CellPhones default htm 252 Specific Absorption Rate SAR Certification Information Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for Radio Frequency RF energy set by the Federal Communications Commission FCC of the U S Government These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the recommendations of two expert organizations the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement NCRP and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE In both cases the recommendations were developed by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry government and academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF energy The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate SAR The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body expressed in units of watts per kilogram W kg The FCC requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1 6 watts per kilogram 1 6 W kg The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection to the public and to account for any variations in measurements SAR tests are conducted using standard operating
335. twork state IMEI number IMEISV Wi Fi MAC address Bluetooth address and Up time e Battery use displays the applications or services in percentages that are using battery power e Legal information This option displays information about Open source licenses License settings as well as Google legal information This information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal information and facts as well as Google Terms of Service Terms of Service for Android powered Phones and much more pertinent information as a reference Read the information and terms then press to retum to the Settings menu Tip To find your device s Divx registration code and information about registering your device to play Divx protected video tap License settings gt DivX VOD Model number displays the device s model number e Android version displays the firmware version loaded on this device e Baseband version displays the baseband version loaded on this device e Kernel version displays the kernel version loaded on this device e Build number displays the software build number Note Firmware baseband kernel and build numbers are usually used for updates to the handset or support For additional information please contact your T Mobile service representative Changing Your Settings 245 Software Update The Software Update feature enables you to use your phone to connect to the network and upload any new phone
336. tworks gt Use packet data Data Roaming Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider s partner networks and access data services when you are out of your service providers area of coverage 1 Press fay gt and then tap Ke Settings gt Wireless and network gt Mobile networks 2 Tap Data roaming to connect to data services while roaming outside your network Tap Data roaming again to remove the green check mark and deactivate the feature Access Point Names To access a wireless access point p gt Press cay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt Mobile networks gt Access Point Names A list of the Access point names display The active access point displays a bright green filled circle to the right of the name Network mode You can configure your phone to either manually detect and use either a 2G GSM or 3G WCDMA data network connection gt Press ay gt l f and then tap K Settings gt Wireless and network gt Mobile networks gt Network Mode Using the 4G Network To confirm you are always using the fastest possible connection the phone has an automatic detection method where it finds both the fastest and most stable connection communication method This phone is capable of using either 4G 3G services for this connection Note WCDMA is only available on the 4G network 1 Press ay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt Mo
337. u can write applications in the SDK and install them on this device then run the applications using the hardware system and network This feature allows you to configure the device for development Warning Android Dev Phones are not intended for non developer end users Because the device can be configured with system software not provided by or supported by Google or any other company end users operate these devices at their own risk Unknown Sources Before you can download a web application you must enable the Unknown sources feature enables downloading Developers can use this option to install non Market applications 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Applications 2 Tap Unknown sources to active this feature Note If you are notified that you can not download a Market application because it comes from an Unknown source enabling this option corrects this issue 232 Managing Applications This feature allows you to manage installed applications You can view and control currently running services or use the device for application development You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the applications on your phone and clear the data cache or defaults p Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Applications gt Manage applications Clearing Application Cache and Data Important You must have downloaded
338. uctions Using Voice Talk This is a voice recognition application used to activate a wide variety of functions on your phone 1 From the Home screen tap id Applications gt Voice talk Read the on screen Samsung Disclaimer information and tap Confirm to continue Tap Agree to accept the Vlingo terms of service Review the tutorial information and tap Next to continue Call Functions and Contacts List 61 62 Read the information on the What can I say screen then tap Done When the Voice talk windows displays you can either tap an on screen icon and follow the prompts 0r Tap Tap amp Speak to say ET what you would like to or do Some commands include e Call John Doe e Call John Doe mobile e Text Katie Message Hey e Play music e Directions to XXX International Calls 1 From the Home screen tap i and then touch and hold until the device dials voice mail Use the on screen keypad to enter the country code area code and phone number If you make a mistake tap al once to delete a single digit Touch and hold J to delete all digits Tap AAI Pause Dialing You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with automated systems such as voicemail or financial phone numbers 2 Second Pause automatically sends the next set of numbers after a two second pause This is indicated in the number string as a comma e Wait sends th
339. ul when multiple characters are available within one key Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of the first word in each sentence standard English style e Voice input activates the Voice input feature This is an experimental feature that uses Google s networked speech recognition application e Auto full stop automatically inserts a full stop by tapping the space bar twice e Tutorial launches a brief onscreen tutorial covering the main concepts related to the Samsung keypad Using XT9 Predictive Text XT9 is a predictive text system that has next letter prediction and regional error correction which compensates for users pressing the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards 1 Press fay gt Ef and then tap sO gt Language and keyboard gt Samsung keypad Tap the XT9 field A checkmark indicates activation Tap the XT9 advanced settings and configure any of the following advanced options e Word completion tells your device to attempt to predict how to complete the word you have started A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled e Word completion point sets how many letters should be entered before a word prediction is made Choose from 2 letters 3 letters 4 letters or 5 letters e Spell correction enables the automatic correction of typographical errors by selecting from a list of possible words that reflect both the characters of the keys you touched and those of nearby
340. ur or Never This value appears as a countdown within this Visible time out field Scanning for Devices This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so you can pair with them 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt Bluetooth settings gt Scan for devices Your phone begins scanning and lists any discovered devices in the Bluetooth devices section 2 Tapa device name to pair with the device Important Some Bluetooth devices are secured and require a PIN number to confirm and pair with them 214 3 Enter a PIN to pair with the device if one is required and tap OK USB Utilities 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Wireless and network gt USB utilities gt Connect storage to PC 2 If prompted tap OK to turn USB debugging mode off 3 Plug in a compatible USB cable to begin using the device for mass storage mode USB Tethering This option allows you to share your phone s mobile data connection via a direct USB connection between your phone and computer A wireless version of this same functionality would be the Mobile AP feature Note You can not mount your phone s microSD card to your computer while using the USB tethering feature If additional software or USB drivers are required navigate to http Awww samsung com us support downloads p gt Press fay gt and then tap Keys Settings gt Wireless and network gt USB tethering
341. urity 2 Tap Use wireless networks to enable location information using the wireless network Enabling the GPS Satellites 1 Press Ol gt and then tap OP Settings gt Location and security 2 Tap Use GPS satellites enable the GPS satellite Enabling the sensor aiding 1 Press fay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Location and security For more information refer to Enabling a Location source on page 162 228 2 Tap Use sensor aiding enhances positioning and save power while using the sensors Screen Unlock Pattern Settings To secure data and limit phone access set the phone to require a screen unlock pattern each time you turn on the device or every time the phone wakes up from sleep mode when the screen automatically turns off Setting an Unlock Pattern Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the phone When you enable the User visible pattern field you will draw an unlock pattern on the screen whenever you want to unlock the phone s buttons or touch screen When you activate the User tactile feedback field you feel vibration as feedback while drawing the pattern Note Make sure the Require Pattern field is activated Press ay gt and then tap OP Settings gt Location and security Tap Set up screen lock gt Pattern Read the instructions then tap Next Review the onscreen animation procedure for drawing a pattern and tap Next when you are ready to draw a pattern
342. used for editing the picture p From the Home screen tap td Applications gt k Photo editor For more information refer to Photo Editor on page 135 Places Polaris Office Google Places displays company logos on a layer of Google Maps When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business or person find out more information about the business see coupons public responses and more The application can also open Adobe PDF Portable Document 1 From the Home screen tap aa Applications gt Format files 4 Places 1 From the Home screen tap Polaris Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office compatible Office suite This application provides a central place for managing your documents online or offline Applications gt Tap Q Search and then use the Find places field to WD Polaris Office manually enter a desired place or choose from among the 2 Read the registration information and enter your Name and various categories Matches are filtered by those closest to Email information if desired your current location 3 Tap Later to ignore this registration or Register to complete Locate and tap one of the listed places Restaurants the process Cafes Bars Attractions user added searches or IN THIS 4 Read the End User License Agreement then tap Accept if AREA A list of places within this category displays Tap the Maps icon to launch the related maps feature Press and then t
343. usic stops playing the currently selected song or playlist Using Playlists Playlists are used to assign music files into groups for playback These Playlists can be created using the Music player on this device or using a third party application such as Windows Media Player and downloading those files to an SD card inserted into the device Creating a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap FA Applications gt Music Player 2 Tap the Playlists tab 3 Press and then tap Create 4 Backspace over the default playlist title and type a new name for this playlist then tap Save Adding Music to a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap Music Player 2 Tap the Playlists tab Applications gt 3 Tap the playlist name in which to add music Multimedia 149 4 Press E and then tap Add Editing a Playlist or Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist you can Tap Add music also share delete or rename the playlist Only those playlist you have created can be edited Default Note If a playlist is empty add a song by touching a holding a song name playlists can not be renamed from the main screen to open the context menu Select Add to playlist 1 From the Home screen tap cd Applications gt 5 Tap a music file or tap Select all to add all the music tracks Music Player to this playlist then tap Add 2 Tap the Playlists tab Removing Music from a Playlist 3 Touch and hold a pla
344. vant site operator 280 Subscription Information Use of the Service may involve transmission of data through your service provider s network Your network service provider may charge you for such data transmission Samsung assumes no responsibility for the payment of any such charges Availability The Service may be network dependent contact your network service provider for more information Samsung reserves the right in its sole discretion to change improve and correct the Service The Service may not be available during maintenance breaks and other times Samsung may also decide to discontinue the Service or any part thereof in its sole discretion In such case you will be provided with prior notification Samsung does not represent or warrant that the Service or any part thereof is appropriate or available for use in any particular jurisdiction If you choose to access the Service you do so on you own initiative and at you own risk and you are responsible for complying with all US federal state and local laws rules and regulations Dealings with Others You may interact with other users on or through the Service You agree that any such interactions do not involve Samsung and are solely between you and the other user s Intellectual Property The Service and related software are protected under international copyright laws and you are hereby notified that copyrights are claimed by Samsung Subject to the Terms
345. vice e Text Message E to send the current number a new text message To view additional dialing options p gt Tap r Add to contacts to add the current number to either a new or existing Contacts entry Speed dial setting to access the Speed Dialing menu where you can assign a speed dial location to a current Contacts entry Send message to send the current caller a text message while still maintaining the current call active Add 2 sec pause to insert a two second pause to enter a 2 second delay within a number string the phone continues dialing after 2 seconds without any additional keys being pressed e Add wait to insert a hard pause within the number string the phone waits for your input A wait requires that any consecutive numbers be manually sent by tapping Send Answering a Call When somebody calls you the phone rings and displays the incoming call image The caller s phone number picture or name if stored in Contacts List displays p Atthe incoming call screen e Touch and slide in any direction to answer the call e Touch and slide LO in any direction to reject the call e Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and tap a predefined rejection message or tap Create new message to create a new custom outgoing response Pressing the Volume down button mutes the ringer If the incoming call is from a number stored in your Contacts the entry s name is displayed You may a
346. when you have multiple entries for the same person 1 From the Home screen tap Ba 2 Tapa Contact entry 3 Press and then tap Mark as default The Mark as default screen displays radio buttons next to the contact name phone number or other contact information 4 Tap the radio button next to the entry information you want to be the primary information such as name phone number or email and select Save Note If there are multiple phone numbers assigned to an entry assigning one as the default will automatically dial that number when the contact is selected for dialing Contacts 97 Sending a Namecard A Namecard contains contact information and can be sent to recipients as a Virtual Business Card V card attachment using Bluetooth Google Mail or as a message 1 From the Home screen tap A 2 Tap a Contact entry 3 Press and then tap Send namecard via and select a delivery method Bluetooth Email Gmail or Messaging The Namecard attaches to the selected message type and is delivered when you send the message Note Email appears as an option only after an Internet or Exchange email account has been created Sending All Current Namecards Rather than selecting once Contact entry at a time you can send all of your current entries at once 1 From the Home screen tap a 2 Press and then tap More gt Import Export gt Send namecard via 98 3 Tap Select all to place a check mark alongside al
347. whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer A report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology June 2010 compared cell phone usage for more than 5 000 people with brain tumors glioma and meningioma and a similar number of healthy controls Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain cancer In this study most people had no increased risk of brain cancer from using cell phones For people with the heaviest use of cell phones an average of more than Y2 hour per day every day for over 10 years the study suggested a slight increase in brain cancer However the authors determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions being drawn from this data Additional information about Interphone can be found at http www iarc fr en media centre pr 2010 pdfs pr200_E pdf Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date but it did not answer all questions about cell phone safety Additional research is being conducted around the world and the FDA continues to monitor developments in this field International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users COSMOS The COSMOS study aims to conduct long term health monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there are any health issues linked to long term exposure to radio frequency energy from cell phone use The COSMOS study will follow approximately 300 000 adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to 30 years Additional information
348. y 1 Press fa gt and then tap OP Settings gt Wireless and network gt USB utilities gt Connect storage to PC 198 Note To use any downloaded market application that requires a USB connection between your phone and your PC you should first set the USB setting to Mass storage 2 Connect the USB cable to the phone and connect the cable to the computer 3 Tap Connect USB storage Both the phone and computer display icons to show that the device is mounted As soon as the connection is established a drive letter is assigned to the phone s storage device A pop up window displays on the PC when connected 4 Open the folder to view files 5 Copy files from the PC to the memory card Prior to using Kies air for Phone Update Before using Kies air to upgrade your device it is recommended that you backup your personal data prior to use To export a Contact list to your microSD card 1 From the Home screen tap A Contacts 2 Press and then tap More gt Import Export 3 Tap Export to SD card gt OK For more information refer to Export Import on page 103 Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt Ea Gallery 2 Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos 3 Remove the back cover and remove the internal microSD card prior to initiating a Kies air update Enabling USB Debugging USB debugging must be enabled before
349. y gt and then tap OP Settings gt Location and security 2 Tap Visible passwords to activate this feature Device Administration Activating this feature allows Google to administrate your phone in a way similar to IT security settings on a corporate PC This would be beneficial in the case that your phone was lost or stolen The phone could be deactivated or restricted through administration from a remote location 1 Press a gt l E and then tap Ko Settings gt Location and security 2 Tap Select device administrators to begin configuring this setting 3 Select an administrator device and follow the prompts Credential Storage This option allows certain applications to access secure certificates and other credentials Certificates and credentials can be installed to the SD card and password protected 1 Press cay gt and then tap 0 Settings gt Location and security 2 Tap Use secure credentials to activate this feature A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates secure credentials is active 3 Tap Install from USB storage to install encrypted certificates from the USB Storage location 4 Tap Set password to set or change the credential storage password 5 Tap Clear storage to clear the storage SD card or phone memory of all contents and reset the credentials password Changing Your Settings 231 Applications This phone can be used for Android development Yo
350. y confirm that the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see before following them All users should pay attention to road conditions closures traffic and all other factors that may impact safe driving or walking Always obey posted road signs Emergency Calls This mobile device like any wireless mobile device operates using radio signals wireless and landline networks as well as user programmed functions which cannot guarantee connection in all conditions areas or circumstances Therefore you should never rely solely on any wireless mobile device for essential communications medical emergencies for example Before traveling in remote or underdeveloped areas plan an alternate method of contacting emergency services Health and Safety Information 259 personnel Remember to make or receive any calls the mobile device must be switched on and in a service area with adequate signal strength Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile device networks or when certain network services and or mobile device features are in use Check with local service providers To make an emergency call 1 If the mobile device is not on switch it on r 2 From the Home screen tap is Enter the emergency number for your present location for example 911 or other official emergency number then tap a Emergency numbers vary by location If certain features are in use call blocking for example you may
351. y warranty applicable to the device e Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your vehicle are securely mounted e Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly e When using a headset in dry environments static electricity can build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical shock To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static electricity before inserting the headset e Do not store or carry flammable liquids gases or explosive materials in the same compartment as the mobile device its parts or accessories e For vehicles equipped with an air bag remember that an air bag inflates with great force Do not place objects including installed or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area If wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates serious injury could result e Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft The use of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to the aircraft s operation Check with appropriate authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on an aircraft e Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or denial of cell phone servic
352. ylist entry to reveal the on screen 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt context menu Music Player 4 Tap Edit title 2 Tap the Playlists tab 5 Enter a new name for this playlist and tap Save 3 Tap the playlist name in which to delete music 4 Touch and hold a song to reveal the on screen context menu 5 Tap Remove gt OK 150 Transferring Music Files Music files can be downloaded to the phone using one of two methods 1 Downloaded to the phone from or Android Market Music files are directly stored on your phone 2 Downloaded to the phone via a direct USB connection Music files are stored into a Music folder on the SD card For more information refer to Connecting to the SD card on page 54 Removing Music Files 1 From the Home screen tap Music Player 2 Tap the All tab 3 Touch and hold a song entry to reveal the on screen context menu Applications gt 4 Tap Delete gt OK The music file s is deleted T Mobile TV T Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and Video on Demand 1 From the Home screen tap td Applications gt BD T Mobile TV The T Mobile Terms and Conditions page displays Note A data plan is required to use this feature Charges may apply Please contact your service provider for further details 2 Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions Tap Exit to close the application Note T Mobile TV must be
353. ync contacts synchronizes the contacts between your phone and the remote exchange server e Sync calendar synchronizes your exchange calendar entries between your phone and the remote exchange server e Sync task synchronizes your exchange tasks entries between your phone and the remote exchange server e Set first line view type allows you to configure what is displayed in the first line of the email display Choose from either Subject or Sender 4 Press to return to the previous page Using Google Mail Google Mail Gmail is Google s web based email When you first setup the phone Gmail is configured Depending on the synchronization settings Gmail is automatically synchronized with your Gmail account Signing into Google Mail 1 From the Home screen tap td gt m Gmail Note You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to access features such as Google Mail and Android Market 2 Tap Next to add a Google account 3 Tap Create if you do not have a Google account Tap Sign in if you have a Google account The Inbox loads conversations and email Opening Gmail 1 From the Home screen tap id gt M Gmail 2 Tap an existing email message Refreshing Google Mail gt From within the Gmail message list press and then tap Refresh to send and receive new emails and synchronize your email with the Gmail account Composing a Gmail Message 1 From the Home screen tap co gt ads Gmail 2 From the G
354. you wish to attach to delete the attached file To insert a Gallery Contacts Location Calendar and Memo item press f and tap Insert and make a selection Tap the file you wish to attach w Note If you attach an image to your email you have the option to resize it 8 prior to delivery Choose from Original Large 70 Medium 30 or Small 10 Once chosen tap OK Once complete tap Send Configuring Email Settings 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap co gt Email Select an account From the email list screen press and then tap More gt Account settings Messages 117 118 Alter any of the following settings e Account name displays your uniquely created account display name e Your name displays the name used in the From field of your outgoing email messages e Add signature Lets you attach a customized signature to the bottom of all outgoing emails e Signature Lets you create an email signature for your outgoing Gmail email messages Email check frequency adjusts the time interval used by your device to check your email account for new email messages e Default account Assign this account as the default email account used for outgoing messages e Always Cc Bcc myself allows you to include your own email address in either the CC Bec or None fields Lets you always receive a copy of outgoing emails Email notifications Activates the email notification icon to
355. your phone for the first time you ll need to install and charge the battery and install the SIM card The SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as your PIN available optional services and many other features If desired you can also install an SD card to store media for use with your phone Understanding this User Manual The sections of this manual generally follow the features of your phone A robust index for features begins on page 293 Also included is important safety information that you should know before using your phone This information is available near the back of the guide beginning on page 248 This manual provides navigation instructions according to the default display settings If you select other settings navigation may be different Unless otherwise specified all instructions in this manual assume you are starting from the Home screen and using the available keys Note Instructions in this manual are based on default settings and may vary from your phone depending on the software version on your phone and any changes to the phone s Settings Unless stated otherwise instructions in this User Manual start with the phone unlocked at the Home screen All screen images in this manual are simulated Actual displays may vary depending on the software version of your phone and any changes to the phone s Settings Special Text Throughout this manual you ll find text that is set apart

Samsung SGH-T769NKBTMB User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents